• 84000
  • The Collection
  • The Kangyur
  • Discourses
  • Heap of Jewels
  • Toh 56

This rendering does not include the entire published text

The full text is available to download as pdf at:
/translation/toh56.pdf

བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའི་སྡེ་སྣོད།

The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva
Chapter 11: The Perfection of Wisdom

Bodhisatva­piṭaka
འཕགས་པ་བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའི་སྡེ་སྣོད་ཅེས་བྱ་བ་ཐེགས་ཆེན་པོའི་མདོ།
’phags pa byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod ces bya ba thegs chen po’i mdo
The Noble Mahāyāna Sūtra “The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva”
Ārya­bodhisatva­piṭaka­nāma­mahāyāna­sūtra

Toh 56

Degé Kangyur, vol. 40 (dkon brtsegs, kha), folios 225.b–294.a; vol. 41 (dkon brtsegs, ga), folios 1.b–205.b

ᴛʀᴀɴsʟᴀᴛᴇᴅ ɪɴᴛᴏ ᴛɪʙᴇᴛᴀɴ ʙʏ
  • Surendrabodhi, Śīlendra, Dharmatāśīla

Imprint

84000 logo

Translated by The Norwegian Institute of Palaeography and Historical Philology
under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha

First published 2023

Current version v 1.0.4 (2024)

Generated by 84000 Reading Room v2.26.1

84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha is a global non-profit initiative to translate all the Buddha’s words into modern languages, and to make them available to everyone.

Logo for the license

This work is provided under the protection of a Creative Commons CC BY-NC-ND (Attribution - Non-commercial - No-derivatives) 3.0 copyright. It may be copied or printed for fair use, but only with full attribution, and not for commercial advantage or personal compensation. For full details, see the Creative Commons license.

Options for downloading this publication

This print version was generated at 9.46pm on Thursday, 28th November 2024 from the online version of the text available on that date. If some time has elapsed since then, this version may have been superseded, as most of 84000’s published translations undergo significant updates from time to time. For the latest online version, with bilingual display, interactive glossary entries and notes, and a variety of further download options, please see
https://84000.co/translation/toh56.


co.

Table of Contents

ti. Title
im. Imprint
co. Contents
s. Summary
ac. Acknowledgements
i. Introduction
tr. The Translation
+ 11 chapters- 11 chapters
1. Chapter 1: The Householder
2. Chapter 2: The Yakṣa Kimbhīra
3. Chapter 3: The Examination of the Bodhisatva
4. Chapter 4: The Inconceivable Tathāgata
5. Chapter 5: Love, Compassion, Empathetic Joy, and Equanimity
6. Chapter 6: The Perfection of Generosity
7. Chapter 7: The Perfection of Morality
8. Chapter 8: The Perfection of Patient Acceptance
9. Chapter 9: The Perfection of Vigor
10. Chapter 10: The Perfection of Meditation
11. Chapter 11: The Perfection of Wisdom
c. Colophon
ab. Abbreviations
n. Notes
b. Bibliography
g. Glossary

s.

Summary

s.­1

In The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, the Buddha describes in detail the views and practices that are to be followed by the bodhisatva, the ideal Mahāyāna practitioner. Through his interactions with human and nonhuman interlocutors, and through stories of various past buddhas, we are led step by step through the topics of renunciation, the mind of awakening, the four immeasurables, and the six perfections. Among the many accounts of past buddhas included in the sūtra, we find the story of the prophecy made by the Buddha Dīpaṅkara to the brahmin Megha about his future attainment of awakening as the Buddha Śākyamuni.


ac.

Acknowledgements

ac.­1

Translation by Prof. Jens Braarvig, Fredrik Liland, and David Welsh. Jens Braarvig directed the translation process and checked the translation against the Sanskrit and Tibetan. Fredrik Liland prepared the Sanskrit and Tibetan editions, translated chapters 1–9 and 11, and prepared the introduction and glossary. David Welsh prepared and translated chapter 10 and was responsible for editing the English. The translators would like to express their gratitude to all those who contributed in various ways to the translation process.

ac.­2

The translation was completed under the patronage and supervision of 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. The 84000 translation team edited the translation and the introduction, and Laura Goetz copyedited the text. Martina Cotter was in charge of the digital publication process.


The translation of this text has been made possible through the generous sponsorship of Chang Tai Kwang.


i.

Introduction

i.­1

The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva1 is the twelfth and lengthiest among the texts in the Great Heap of Jewels (Mahāratnakūṭa) section of the Tibetan Kangyur, where it makes up nearly an entire volume. It is an extensive presentation of the view and conduct of the bodhisatva, the ideal Mahāyāna practitioner. The title, Bodhisatva­piṭaka, can also be translated as The Basket of the Bodhisatvas, implying that it represents a basket (piṭaka) of teachings separate from the traditional three‍—Sūtra, Vinaya, and Abhidharma‍—distinguishing the path of the bodhisatva from the lesser path of the śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas.


Text Body

The Translation
The Noble Mahāyāna Sūtra
The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva

1.

Chapter 1: The Householder

[V40] [F.255.b] [B1]


1.­1

[MS.1.b] Homage to all the buddhas and bodhisatvas. Homage to the noble and princely Mañjuśrī.6


1.­2

Thus did I hear at one time. The Lord once spent the rainy season in retreat at Śrāvastī. When the three months had passed, he prepared his mendicant robes, put them on, and started wandering the country again in the company of a large assembly of mendicants, 1,250 strong. The Lord was esteemed, revered, praised, and honored by monks and nuns, laymen and laywomen, by kings and ministers, by various followers of other teachings, by ascetics, brahmins, and householders, and by gods, nāgas, yakṣas, gandharvas, asuras, garuḍas, kinnaras, and mahoragas. The Lord received a great abundance of robes, foodstuffs, bedding and seats, medical supplies, and utensils.


2.

Chapter 2: The Yakṣa Kimbhīra

2.­1

After the Lord had left the five hundred householders in a balanced state of mind on his way to the city, he entered the great city of Rājagṛha with perfect grace.

2.­2

One of the city deities of Rājagṛha was a yakṣa named Kimbhīra. He thought to himself, “In this world, it is extremely rare to encounter anyone who is such a worthy recipient of offerings. We should make offerings to the Lord.”

2.­3

The yakṣa Kimbhīra then presented the Lord with offerings that looked exquisite, smelled exquisite, tasted exquisite, and felt exquisite, and because of his empathy for Kimbhīra, the Lord accepted his offerings. When Kimbhīra had given his offerings to the Lord, cheers of “Wonderful!” arose from a great crowd of sixty-eight thousand yakṣas surrounding Kimbhīra in the sky.


3.

Chapter 3: The Examination of the Bodhisatva

3.­1

The venerable Śāriputra got up from his seat, placed his robe over one shoulder, knelt down on his right knee, joined his hands in reverence, and spoke to the Lord: “I would like to ask the Lord, the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha, for some direction, if the Lord will grant that possibility with an explanation of the question when asked.”

3.­2

The Lord answered the venerable Śāriputra, “You may ask the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha whatever you like, Śāriputra, and I will delight your mind by explaining whatever it is you wish to ask about.”


4.

Chapter 4: The Inconceivable Tathāgata

4.­1

“Now, Śāriputra, a bodhisatva with firm confidence has faith in the inconceivable tathāgata, the arhat, the fully accomplished Buddha, in respect of his ten qualities. He has trust and confidence and does not doubt him, and to an even greater degree he feels pleasure, joy, and satisfaction. What are these ten qualities? He has faith in the inconceivable body of the Tathāgata, he has trust and confidence, and he does not doubt it, and to an even greater degree he feels pleasure, joy, and satisfaction as he produces the concept of it as being truly wondrous and extraordinary. He has great faith, and so forth in the voice of the Tathāgata, as he produces the concept of it as being truly wondrous and extraordinary. [MS.20.b] He has faith in the knowledge of the Tathāgata, his inconceivable tathāgata radiance, his inconceivable tathāgata morality and concentration, his inconceivable magical tathāgata abilities, his inconceivable tathāgata power, his inconceivable tathāgata confidence, his inconceivable great compassion, and his [F.288.b] inconceivable unique buddha qualities, he has trust and confidence and does not doubt it, and to an even greater degree he feels pleasure, joy, and satisfaction as he produces the concept of it as being truly wondrous and extraordinary. He sets forth with vigor, and he does not tire or become discouraged or intimidated in his pursuit of these ten inconceivable, wondrous and extraordinary qualities of the Tathāgata. He is so committed that even if his physical body with its sinews, muscles, skin, and bones were to rot, and even if his flesh and blood were to dry up, his vigor would not fail as long as he had not attained these ten inconceivable, wondrous, and extraordinary qualities of the Tathāgata. In this way, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva with faithful conviction has great faith in the inconceivable, truly wondrous and extraordinary qualities of the Tathāgata. He has trust and confidence and does not doubt it, and to an even greater degree he feels pleasure, joy, and satisfaction.”


5.

Chapter 5: Love, Compassion, Empathetic Joy, and Equanimity

5.­1

“Now, Śāriputra, [F.49.a] the lords, the buddhas, consider a bodhisatva with such firm devotion to be a suitable vessel. They consider him to be a suitable vessel for the cycle of teachings contained within The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva. They consider him to be a suitable vessel for the Buddhist teachings, and they reveal to him the path of the bodhisatva when he approaches them. Therefore, Śāriputra, [MS.54.a] one should understand things by means of this cycle of teachings. The lords, the buddhas, consider a bodhisatva with such firm devotion to be a suitable vessel. They consider him to be a suitable vessel for the cycle of teachings contained within The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva. They consider him to be a suitable vessel for the Buddhist teachings, and they reveal to him the path of the bodhisatva when he approaches them.


6.

Chapter 6: The Perfection of Generosity

6.­1

“Now, Śāriputra, how does one practice the perfections? Śāriputra, there are six perfections that bodhisatvas engage in when they practice the bodhisatva path. What are these six perfections? They are the perfection of generosity, the perfection of morality, the perfection of patient acceptance, the perfection of vigor, the perfection of meditation, and the perfection of wisdom.

6.­2

“What is the perfection of generosity? Śāriputra, the bodhisatva gives support to ascetics, brahmins, and the wretched. He gives food to those in need of food, [F.56.b] drink to those in need of drink. He gives vehicles, clothes, fragrance, garlands, ointments, shelter, utensils, medicine for the sick, light, music, male and female servants, gold, jewels, pearls, gems, conches, crystals, and coral. He gives horses, elephants, chariots, parks, hermitages, sons, daughters, wives, treasure, grain, stocks, storerooms, and all the pleasures enjoyed by the kings of the four continents. He gives all his joys and amusements, and he gives his hands, feet, ears, nose, eyes, head, flesh, blood, marrow, and bone. There is not a single worldly object that he will not part with for those in need.


7.

Chapter 7: The Perfection of Morality

7.­1

“What is the perfection of morality of bodhisatvas, great beings, like? [MS.61.a] How do bodhisatvas conduct themselves when they practice the bodhisatva path? Śāriputra, the conduct of bodhisatvas is good in three ways. What are these three ways? They are good bodily conduct, good verbal conduct, and good mental conduct. Now, what does good bodily conduct imply? Śāriputra, good bodily conduct implies that a bodhisatva abstains from taking life, abstains from taking what is not given, and abstains from sexual misconduct. Moreover, Śāriputra, good verbal conduct implies that a bodhisatva abstains from lying and abstains from slander, harsh words, and inane chatter. Finally, good mental conduct implies that a bodhisatva is not covetous, is without malice, and holds right views.


8.

Chapter 8: The Perfection of Patient Acceptance

8.­1

“Now, Śāriputra, what is the bodhisatva’s perfection of patient acceptance, by which he wholeheartedly practices the way of the bodhisatva? Śāriputra, the bodhisatva’s patience comes from a natural ability for endurance. He can patiently accept cold and heat, starvation and thirst, wind and scorching heat, [MS.81.a] insects and reptiles, and people speaking to him in unpleasant and unwelcome ways. He is patient with painful sensations that are related to or produced by the physical body and endures them easily, whether they are intense, strong, sharp, life threatening, or deadly.


9.

Chapter 9: The Perfection of Vigor

9.­1

“Now, Śāriputra, what is the bodhisatvas’ perfection of vigor like, the perfection of vigor by means of which bodhisatvas, great beings, practice the way of the bodhisatva and that makes bodhisatvas, great beings, invulnerable to attacks by Māra and his retinue, the gods, and all other opponents?101

9.­2

“Śāriputra, the vigor of the bodhisatva, the great being, is unyielding and involves no concern for his body or his life. When he has cultivated this powerful vigor, he will seek out the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva. He will study it conscientiously, learn it, memorize it, recite it, absorb it, clarify it for others, teach it in great detail, commit it to writing, and preserve it.


10.

Chapter 10: The Perfection of Meditation

10.­1

“What, then, is the bodhisatva’s perfection of meditation like, the perfection of meditation by means of which bodhisatvas, great beings, practice the way of the bodhisatva? Śāriputra, the bodhisatva has left desires behind. He has left evil, unwholesome qualities behind, and he attains and abides in the first meditative state, the state of joy and happiness [F.144.a] that is born from seclusion and that includes conceptualization and deliberation.


11.

Chapter 11: The Perfection of Wisdom

11.­1

“Now, Śāriputra, what is the bodhisatvas’ perfection of wisdom like, the perfection of wisdom by means of which bodhisatvas, great beings, practice the way of the bodhisatva? Śāriputra, the bodhisatva conscientiously studies the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva; he learns it, memorizes it, reads it, absorbs it, clarifies it to others, and teaches it in great detail. When he has conscientiously studied the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, when he has learned it, memorized it, read it, clarified it to others, and taught it in great detail, he develops the different aspects of wisdom.

11.­2

“Now, what are the different aspects of this wisdom, and how should one engage with it? The different aspects of wisdom involve learning, and one should engage with it in a non-superficial way. Now, what are the different aspects of learning? They are inclination, motivation, engagement, spiritual friendship, not being conceited, reverence, respect, skill, being receptive,121 being favorable, being attentive, veneration, being mentally engaged, being unmoving, considering wisdom to be a jewel, considering it to be medicine, considering it to be what alleviates all sickness, the vessel of mindfulness, the knowledge that comes from understanding, a radiant intellect, intellectual engagement, being insatiable when learning about the qualities of the Buddha, the nourishment of renunciation, delighting in being generous, relying on great learning, experiencing joy when one pays reverence, being content in one’s body, mental joy, learning without becoming weary, learning the meaning, learning the Dharma, [F.157.b] learning with enthusiasm, learning without being drawn toward other vehicles, learning the perfections, [MS.115.b] learning The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, learning the methods for bringing people together, learning skillful means, learning about the pure states, learning the superior abilities, learning how to establish mindfulness, learning genuine renunciation, learning the foundations of magical abilities, learning about dependent origination, learning about impermanence, learning about suffering, learning about nonself, learning about tranquility, learning about emptiness, learning about freedom from attributes, learning about freedom from aspirations, learning about the lack of conditions, learning about the conditions needed for roots of virtue, independence, thinking that one wants to learn about the Dharma, considering association with certain kinds of people to be unsuitable, thinking that one wants to counteract all the vices, delighting in those who are learned, relying on the noble ones, avoiding those who are not noble, learning about the noble ones, learning about the faculties, learning about the cultivation of mindfulness, learning about the factors of awakening, learning about the eightfold path, and understanding the Tathāgata’s powers, confidence, great love, great compassion, great empathetic joy, equanimity, and analytical abilities and his eighteen unique buddha qualities. Śāriputra, someone who is learned in these things possesses knowledge, and where there is knowledge, insight progresses.

11.­3

“Why is this? Someone who is inclined toward the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva will study, and so he will develop understanding. He will learn, and so his insight progresses. [F.158.a] Someone who is dedicated to the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who engages with the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who relies upon spiritual friends will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who is not conceited will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who holds on to what is beneficial will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who is receptive will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who shows reverence for great learning will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who is attentive will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who has veneration for great learning will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who is mentally engaged with great learning will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who sees great learning as a jewel will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who sees great learning as medicine will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who sees that absorbing great learning will lead to the pacification of desire, anger, and confusion will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. [F.158.b] Someone who absorbs a great deal of learning with the intention of retaining it will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who attempts to arrive at an understanding of phenomena will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone whose mind yearns for great learning will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who absorbs great learning and whose intellect is agile will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. [MS.116.a] Someone who is not satisfied with his learning will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks about generosity and becomes motivated to give things up will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks about morality and then guards his morality will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks about patient acceptance and who is patient will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks about vigor will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks about meditation and does not let his mind wander will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks about wisdom and directs his mind toward the elimination of the defilements will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who rejoices in great learning will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who becomes content in his body when he listens to the Dharma will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who becomes joyful in his mind when he listens to the Dharma will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who becomes motivated after learning about the Mahāyāna will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. [F.159.a] Someone who learns about the methods for bringing people together and sets his mind on these methods will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks about establishing mindfulness and remains mindful of his body, mindful of his feelings, mindful of his mind, and mindful of mental phenomena will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks about genuine renunciation and is ashamed and embarrassed by his unwholesome tendencies will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who maintains an intellect that does not shun wholesome states whenever they arise will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks on the foundations of magical abilities and develops agility of body, agility of mind, and agility of inclination will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks on meditation and steers his mind toward reflection will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks on the immeasurables and has love for all sentient beings, compassion for the wretched, empathetic joy for all phenomena, and equanimity toward misdeeds will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks on the faculties and directs his mind toward the faculty of faith, the faculty of vigor, the faculty of mindfulness, the faculty of concentration, and the faculty of wisdom will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks on the factors of awakening [MS.116.b] and applies his mind to understanding all phenomena will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. Someone who listens to talks on the path and applies his mind to attaining nirvāṇa will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. [F.159.b] Someone who hears of the Tathāgata’s powers, confidence, great love, great compassion, empathetic joy, equanimity, analytical abilities, and eighteen unique, immeasurable buddha qualities and applies his mind to attaining unsurpassed perfect awakening will learn. As he learns he will develop understanding, and as he develops understanding his insight progresses. These, Śāriputra, are what are known as the forty-one aspects of engagement with learning, and this, Śāriputra, is how the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­4

“Moreover, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva who practices the perfection of wisdom conscientiously studies the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva; he learns it, memorizes it, reads it, absorbs it, clarifies it to others, and teaches it in great detail, and when he has done so his insight progresses substantially. How is it that his insight into phenomena progresses? When he masters what he has been taught, his insight into phenomena progresses.

11.­5

“Moreover, his insight into phenomena progresses when he does not hold on to any phenomena. Why is this? It is because grasping at phenomena stands in opposition to this progress. It is not possible that a person who grasps at phenomena will be able to leave these phenomena behind. This is what is impossible. Even those who are adept at non-grasping have some doubts with regard to their insight into phenomena, and so those who continue to hold on to phenomena will certainly have such doubts. Therefore, by not grasping at any phenomena, insight progresses.

11.­6

“Furthermore, what is meant by progressing insight is that phenomena are unobscured. That there is no conceit with regard to phenomena, no grasping, no vanity, no arising, and no ceasing‍—this is what is meant by progressing insight.

11.­7

“Furthermore, what is meant by progressing insight is that there is no appropriation or removal in relation to phenomena.

11.­8

“Furthermore, nothing is taught anywhere, there is no teaching to be seen, and therefore all phenomena are unseen and ungraspable. [F.160.a] They have a single essential characteristic. What is this essential characteristic? It is that they have no essential characteristics. The essential characteristic can be said to be an essential non-characteristic. Both are the case. How so? When one imputes or imposes an essential characteristic, this is an essential non-characteristic. One may say, ‘This essential characteristic is an essential non-characteristic.’ He wakes up to the fact that all phenomena have this as their essential characteristic,122 namely that they are without characteristics, unseen, and ungraspable‍—this is what is meant by progressing insight. You should apply yourself to this insight. You must reach the stage where there is no longer any veil between you and phenomena.”

11.­9

The Lord then spoke these verses:

11.­10
“For one who is committed to The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva,
Insight continually progresses. He is clear sighted.
He does not hold on to phenomena.
When one is free from grasping, insight progresses.
11.­11
“He does not appropriate phenomena, he does not create emptiness.
He does not dwell on the emptiness of phenomena,123
And he does not retain any conceit when it comes to empty phenomena. [MS.117.a]
When one is unconceited, insight progresses.
11.­12
“There is no thing to accomplish, nothing to leave behind.
Phenomena have no qualities that one can get hold of.
The essential characteristic of phenomena is that they cannot be grasped.
This is what progress in insight is like.
11.­13
“When one does not cling to any phenomena whatsoever
And does not regard oneself as the owner of this understanding,
When one does not cling to knowledge but maintains an unconceited approach,
That is what progress in insight is like.
11.­14
“The learned should possess the qualities of simplicity.
You should apply yourself to the Dharma.
If you act in this way, as I have recommended,
You will enter the door of the Dharma and be purified.
11.­15
“The door of purity leads to an understanding of this Dharma,
And one will come to know the inclinations of sentient beings.
The wise know the inclinations of sentient beings
And teach the Dharma in a way that is suitable.
11.­16
“He skillfully discerns the ultimate truth of the profound Dharma
And is always able to ascertain its meaning.
He excels in the qualities of boundless acts.
The great learning of the knowledgeable one is like the ocean. [F.160.b]
11.­17
“The meaning of this, the meaning of these words,
Is not something that can ever be fully understood.
Their meaning is limitless, these words are limitless,
And the essence of insight is unshakable.

“This, Śāriputra, is how the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­18

“Moreover, Śāriputra, when the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom, when he is involved in detailed study, and so forth, and when he teaches the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva to others at great length, all phenomena will become apparent to him, and the darkness of ignorance, the blinding darkness and the constricting veils, will be removed. Wisdom will reveal itself. With this revelation, he will understand what is wholesome and what is unwholesome. He will not act unwholesomely, even in order to save his own life. Someone who, in order to eliminate unwholesome factors, engages in the kind of studies through which wholesome factors can be understood is known as a good and tranquil sage.”

11.­19

The Lord then spoke these verses:

11.­20
“When one enters a gloomy house
Filled with darkness,
Any forms that may be there
Will not be perceptible to the eye.
11.­21
“In the same way, any human being
Who is born here
Cannot know right from wrong
If he has not learned it first.
11.­22
“With learning, one comes to know the Dharma.
With learning, one will not follow what is wrong.
With learning, one will abandon evil.
With learning, one will attain nirvāṇa.
11.­23
“If one is keen to learn, learning will flourish.
With learning, wisdom flourishes.
With wisdom, the meaning of things becomes clearer,
And when one grasps the meaning of things, one reaches happiness.
11.­24
“Those whose wits are sharp will grasp the meaning of things
And will attain nirvāṇa even while in the visible world.
He is engaged with the Dharma and skilled in purification,
And he achieves the ultimate happiness.
11.­25
“They listen to the collected teachings of the bodhisatvas
And master the nature of reality.
Among the appearances of the world,
They engage in the practice of awakening.

“This, Śāriputra, is how the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­26

“Furthermore, Śāriputra, [F.161.a] when the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom, as he is someone who keeps to The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, he thinks of his spiritual friends. This cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva is completely purified, fully cleansed, and [MS.117.b] the motivation to get to the meaning of The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva arises in him. He makes an effort, engages with vigor, focuses his mind, and dedicates himself to this task. He applies himself to the four kinds of perfect exertion and gains unobstructed access to all phenomena.”

11.­27

The Lord then spoke these verses:

11.­28
“He thinks of those who proclaim the Dharma
As his spiritual friends.
He praises them and listens to the Dharma,
Always seeking to advance his insight.
11.­29
“His motivation is constant, it does not wane.
His vigor is constant, and it lifts him up.
He constantly purifies his wisdom,
And knowledge is his constant abode.
11.­30
“He knows the Dharma for himself.
He is not motivated by faith.
He realizes the unmoving reality
That the Buddha explains.
11.­31
“When the learned ones skilled in making useful distinctions
Grasp the meaning of the teaching through their training,
They always cultivate positive habits
And always turn away from negative ones.
11.­32
“He never becomes disheartened.
No Dharma teaching could ever make him feel discouraged.
A supple body, a mind of vigor,
Versatile ambitions‍—he quickly achieves these things.
11.­33
“His knowledge flourishes because of his study of the Dharma.
His knowledge is awakened, and his mindfulness does not falter.
With mindfulness and knowledge as his constant aides,
He knows what is virtuous and what is not virtuous.
11.­34
“His training is bolstered by the unsurpassed Dharma.
He possesses the highest insight, mindfulness, wisdom, and powers.
He knows the inclinations of sentient beings,
As he himself has trained for a very long time.
11.­35
“By means of his training in the Dharma, he becomes exceptional,
And because of his special attainments his knowledge becomes pure.
He understands the inclinations of sentient beings
And instructs them in the Dharma accordingly. [F.161.b]

“This, Śāriputra, is how the bodhisatva, the great being, practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­36

“Furthermore, Śāriputra, when the bodhisatva, the great being, practices the perfection of wisdom, he trains in this way by purifying his intellect and by completely cleansing the doors through which he perceives phenomena. There are two causes, two conditions, from which the right view of the noble ones arises. What are these two causes, these two conditions? They are the words of others, and a non-superficial understanding of oneself. He thinks, ‘What are the words of others, and what does it mean to understand oneself in a way that is not superficial?’ If he considers this carefully, he will think, ‘Those bodhisatvas who engage in spiritual training but have not learned this cycle of teachings that is contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, those who have not heard the noble teachings on discipline but are fascinated by the practice of the concentrations, will only end up strengthening their selfish arrogance. They will not become free from birth, aging, sickness, death, pain, despair, suffering, depression, and struggle. They will not become free from the whole mass of suffering.’ With this in mind, the Tathāgata gives this advice: ‘If one listens to others with an open mind, one will be freed from aging and death.’ ”

11.­37

The Lord said:

11.­38
“With learning, one comes to know the Dharma.
With learning, one will not follow what is wrong.
With learning, one will abandon evil.
With learning, one will attain nirvāṇa.
11.­39
“If one is keen to learn, learning will flourish.
With learning, wisdom flourishes.
With wisdom, the meaning of things becomes clearer,
And when one grasps the meaning of things, one reaches happiness.
11.­40
“Those whose wits are sharp will grasp the meaning of things,
And they will attain nirvāṇa even while in the visible world.
With the pure Dharma and skill in purification,
He achieves the ultimate happiness. [MS.118.a]
11.­41

“Therefore, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva should engage in extensive study of the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, the noble teachings of discipline. He should learn them, memorize them, absorb them, and teach them in great detail to others. Śāriputra, [F.162.a] those who do not study the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, and who only apply themselves in a superficial way, abandon the noble path. With this in mind, the Tathāgata gives this advice: ‘With a proper understanding of oneself, one will be freed from aging and death.’

11.­42

“In the context of this training, what is a bodhisatva’s non-superficial practice like? How does a bodhisatva practice in a way that is not superficial? As he engages in this training, the bodhisatva, the great being, does not apply himself to any Dharma teachings whatsoever. He does not undertake anything. Non-superficial engagement in this context is another term for nonengagement.

11.­43

“Furthermore, the bodhisatva whose engagement is not superficial does not have to make his voice heard. He does not have to repeat himself. It is not possible to understand where his voice issues from. It is not possible to discern a beginning or end to his voice. Where does it arise from? Where does it go? If one searches for what he has said, what he is saying, what he will say, who he spoke for, who he is speaking for, or who he will speak for, for the person he spoke to in order to encourage them to exert themselves, for the person he is speaking to in order to encourage them to exert themselves, for the person he will speak to in order to encourage them to exert themselves, for the person he spoke to in order to help them attain realization, for the person he is speaking to in order to help them attain realization, or for the person he will speak to in order to help them attain realization, one will not be able find any trace of these things in the past, the future, or the present. This is the kind of non-superficial engagement that he trains himself in.

11.­44

“When he engages in this non-superficial way, what is it the bodhisatva sees in a way that is not superficial? As he engages in this training, the bodhisatva sees that it is the nature of all phenomena to cease, and this is when he sees things in a way that is not superficial. When he sees that it is the nature of all phenomena that they are passive, this is when he sees things in a way that is not superficial. When he sees that all phenomena are calm, this is when he sees things in a way that is not superficial. When he sees that it is the nature of all phenomena that they are imperfect, this is when he sees things in a way that is not superficial. [F.162.b] When he sees that all phenomena are unborn, this is when he sees things in a way that is not superficial. When he sees that all phenomena are unarisen, this is when he sees things in a way that is not superficial. When he sees that all phenomena are completely unarisen, this is when he sees things in a way that is not superficial. When he sees all phenomena as final nirvāṇa, this is when he sees things in a way that is not superficial. In this way, he sees; he discerns; and he sees in such a way that he does not see and does not discern. Because he sees in this way, he is known as someone who sees in a way that is not superficial.

11.­45

“Furthermore, as he trains in this way, the bodhisatva who relates to things in a way that is not superficial does not harbor any doubt or confusion in relation to any phenomena. There are no phenomena that remain hidden from someone who relates to things in a way that is not superficial. There are no phenomena that do not become a door to liberation for someone who relates to things in a way that is not superficial. Someone who relates to things in a way that is not superficial does not have to make an effort to get rid of any phenomena. Someone who relates to things in a way that is not superficial does not have to make an effort to attain realization of any phenomena. [MS.118.b] To have a non-superficial view of things is to perceive all phenomena in a non-superficial way, to perceive them just as they are.

11.­46

“What does it mean to perceive all phenomena just as they are? This is nonperception. What does nonperception imply? It implies the use of the designation unborn. Unborn is another word for unarisen. What does unarisen mean? It is another word for something that cannot appear. With this in mind, the Tathāgata said the following: ‘Seeing that all conditioned things are unborn is the way to attain a definitive connection with the true state. This is right view.’

11.­47

“One might wonder, ‘Why is this described as “attaining a certain connection with the true state”?’ Then one should train oneself in the following way: ‘Whatever is the same as all phenomena is the same as the qualities of the Buddha.’ This can be described as ‘attaining a definitive connection with the true state.’ Therefore, those who wish to attain a definitive connection with the true state should study, learn, memorize, recite, and absorb this very cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva in great detail. [F.163.a] They should genuinely engage with this very cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva in a way that is not superficial. This, Śāriputra, is how the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­48

“Furthermore, Śāriputra, when the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom, making an effort to apply himself in a way that is not superficial by purifying his intellect and by completely cleansing the doors through which he perceives phenomena, he will see what non-superficial words are. What does it mean to apply oneself in a way that is not superficial, in this context? What are non-superficial words? The bodhisatva applies himself in a way that is not superficial as follows: He applies himself to gaining stability in calm abiding meditation, and he applies himself to analysis in insight meditation. This is what it means to apply oneself in a way that is not superficial. He applies himself with his body secluded and his mind delighted. He applies himself to the fact that there is no annihilation, and to the fact that there is no permanence. He applies himself to causes and conditions, and to dependent origination. He applies himself to the fact that there is no being, no life force, and no person, and to the fact that there is no coming, no going, and no remaining. He applies himself to the fact that there is no transference, the fact that causes and effects are inconsequential, and to the investigation of the emptiness of causes. He applies himself to the investigation of freedom from attributes, and to the investigation of freedom from aspirations. He does not, however, reify emptiness, freedom from attributes, and freedom from aspirations. He applies himself to the attainments of concentration, but he does not become involved in the kind of birth that comes about through the power of concentrations. He applies himself to gaining knowledge related to the superior abilities, but he does not become entangled in eliminating the defilements. He applies himself to examining nonbirth, but he does not end up on a fixed course. He applies himself to examining the fact that no sentient beings have a self, but he does not end up losing his great compassion. He maintains the perspective that all kinds of birth are terrifying, but he still takes unimaginably many existences upon himself. He does not give up his yearning for nirvāṇa, but he does not reify the Dharma. He remains indifferent to the delights of sensual pleasures, but he does not disregard the joys of the Dharma. [F.163.b] He renounces deliberation, which only proliferates itself, but he does not disregard skillful means. This, Śāriputra, is what it means to apply oneself in a way that is not superficial.

11.­49

“What is meant by non-superficial words, Śāriputra? Words that make sense are not superficial. Furthermore, Śāriputra, words that are not superficial are words that guide one. They are words that act as a door. They are words that give one direction. They are words that are a cause. They are words of investigation. They are words that are not contradictory. They are words that cannot be disputed. They are words of equanimity. They are words that do not attract. [MS.119.a] They are words that do not push away. They are words that do not proliferate. They are words that do not dwindle away. They are words that do not shrink. They are words that do not arise. They are words that do not give any grounds for disagreement. They are words that cannot be refuted. They are words that cannot be opposed. They are words for what is essential. They are words for the way things are. They are words that are not false. They are words that are nothing other than what they are. They are words for the actual state of things. They are words for what is actually the case. They are words that are the same throughout the three times. They are words that are precise. They are words that are not limited to the physical objects of perception. They are words that are not limited to feeling, perception, mental conditioning, or consciousness. They are words that are not limited to the realm of the eye, forms, and the eye consciousness. They are words that are not limited to the realm of the ear, sound, and the ear consciousness. They are words that are not limited to the realm of the nose, smell, and the nose consciousness. They are words that are not limited to the realm of the tongue, taste, and the tongue consciousness. They are words that are not limited to the realm of the body, physical objects, and body consciousness. They are words that are not limited to the realm of the mind, mental objects, and mental consciousness.124 They are words that rely on the meaning. They are words that rely on the Dharma. They are words that rely on knowledge. They are words that rely on the explicit meaning. These, Śāriputra, are words that are not superficial.

11.­50

“In this way, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva makes an effort to apply himself in a way that is not superficial. [F.164.a] He sees what non-superficial words are, and his seeing is just the same as not seeing. He sees in a way that is just like not seeing. He does not discern. Someone who sees like this is known as someone who sees things in a way that is not superficial.

11.­51

“Moreover, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva who applies himself in a way that is not superficial is not confused about any phenomena. For the bodhisatva who applies himself in a way that is not superficial, there are no phenomena whatsoever that do not become a door to liberation. Someone who applies himself in a way that is not superficial does not have to make an effort to give up any phenomena whatsoever. Someone who applies himself in a way that is not superficial does not have to make an effort to realize any phenomenon whatsoever. Right view is to see all phenomena in the right way, to see them just as they are.

11.­52

“What is it, then, to see all phenomena just as they are? It is a non-seeing. What is non-seeing? It is to use the designation unborn. What does unborn mean? It is another word for nonapparent, and so forth. Here, one can insert a further elaboration in the same way it was expressed previously, up to and including ‘This is how the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom.’

11.­53

“Furthermore, Śāriputra, when the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom, he trains in the following way. He sees that just as the self has no self, likewise all phenomena have no self, and this lack of self is the true self of all phenomena. He sees that just as a sentient being has no self, likewise all phenomena have no self. Seeing things in this way is to see things in a way that is not superficial. Someone who sees the realm of cyclic existence in a non-superficial way will see that it is fused with the realm of nirvāṇa. This is what can be described as non-superficial engagement. He sees that there is no difference at all between the nature of the vices and the nature of all phenomena. He does not entertain the conceit of distinguishing between practice and nonpractice. With non-superficial engagement he comes to see things in a way that is not superficial. There are as many varieties of non-superficial practice as there are ways to support all sentient beings, and he will not hinder anything that can act as a support for sentient beings. He will not sabotage anything that can act as a support for the Dharma. This is the non-superficial engagement of the bodhisatva.

11.­54

“These, Śāriputra, are the aspects of wisdom. [F.164.b] This is learning. This is non-superficial engagement. This is seeing in a way that is not superficial. This is what facilitates seeing things the way they are. This is what is known as wisdom. This, then, Śāriputra, is how the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­55

“Furthermore, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva who practices the perfection of wisdom dwells in the wisdom that relates to all phenomena as being conditioned. He is not involved with ignorance, he is not involved with mental conditioning, and so forth, [MS.119.b] and he is not involved with old age and death. He is not involved with the view of self-entity, and he is not involved with any of the other sixty-two kinds of views that have their origin in the view of self-entity. He is not involved with lofty ideas. He is not involved with despondency. He is not involved with the eight ways of the world. He is not involved with pride, arrogance, pride in faults, or any of the twenty other secondary vices. He is not involved with any of the vices, whether gross, subtle, or intermediate. He is not involved with the darkness of confusion, cataract-like veils, obstructing entanglements, or anything else that is inferior. He is not involved with the māras of contention, the māras of the vices, the māras of the skandhas, the devaputra māras, the māras of death, or the activities of any of the other māras. He is not involved with the idea of a self, the idea of a being, the idea of a life force, the idea of growth, the idea of a person, the idea of a man, the idea of a human being, the idea of an individual, or any other such views. He is not involved with the obscurations created by actions, the obscurations created by vices, the obscurations created by phenomena, the obscurations created by views, the obscurations created by the ripening of the effects of previous actions, the obscurations created by ignorance, or any other latent habitual tendencies.125 He is not involved with conceptual ideas, judgements, labels, objects, seeing, hearing, remembering, thinking, or any other mental processes that tie one in knots. [F.165.a] He is not involved with envy or rejection, immorality or morality, malice or patience, laziness or vigor, inattention or meditation, stupidity or wisdom, or any other perfect practices or unhelpful practices, not even knowledge and ignorance. He is not involved with having a positive destiny, having no destiny, or having a negative destiny. He is not involved with what is wholesome or what is unwholesome, with the irreproachable or the reproachable, with cyclic existence or nirvāṇa, or with any other categories such as these. He is not involved with making distinctions between different places, different buddhas, different beings, or different Dharma teachings, or with making any other kind of distinctions. He is not involved with inexperience, knowledge, or comprehension, with the relative truth and the ultimate truth, or with any other kind of mental labeling that sentient beings are involved with. He is not involved with unmoving wisdom, incorporeality, freedom from essential characteristics, freedom from attributes, being unconditioned, or any other such mental exertions, states of mind, or states of consciousness. He is not involved with these or any other immeasurable ways of relating to conditioned phenomena. The wisdom of the bodhisatva who practices the perfection of wisdom lies in his not being involved with any phenomena in the realm of the conditioned. In this way, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­56

“Furthermore, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva who has mastered The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva and practices the perfection of wisdom is skilled in the different features of the perfection of wisdom, and so he masters all phenomena. What are these different features of wisdom? There are ten: a skilled approach to skandhas, a skilled approach to elements, a skilled approach to sense fields, a skilled approach to truth, a skilled approach to analytical abilities, [F.165.b] a skilled approach to relying on things, a skilled approach to consciousness and knowledge, a skilled approach to the factors of awakening, a skilled approach to the path, and a skilled approach to dependent arising. This tenfold division of skill is what is known as the different features of wisdom.

11.­57

“What does it mean, then, to have a skilled approach to the skandhas? One can illustrate the skandhas by giving some examples. They can be compared to froth, to a mirage, to a bubble, to a plantain tree, to an illusion, to a dream, to an echo, to a hallucination, and to a reflection. Form is like froth in that froth has no self, no being, no life force, no person, no man, no human, and no individual. Form has as much essential nature as froth. [MS.120.a] This skillful way of understanding things is what is known as having a skilled approach to the skandhas. Feeling is like a bubble. A bubble has no self, no being, no life force, no person, no human, no individual, no offspring, and no man. Feeling has as much essential nature as a bubble. This skillful way of understanding things is what is known as having a skilled approach to skandhas. Perception is like a mirage. A mirage has no self, no being, no life force, and so forth, and no man. Perception has as much essential nature as a mirage. This skillful way of understanding things is what is known as having a skilled approach to skandhas. Mental conditioning is like a plantain tree. A plantain tree has no self, no being, no life force, and so forth, and no man. Mental conditioning has as much essential nature as a plantain tree. This skillful way of understanding things is what is known as having a skilled approach to skandhas. Consciousness is like an illusion. An illusion has no self, no being, no life force, no person, no human, no individual, no man, [F.166.a] no one who acts, and no one who experiences. Consciousness has as much essential nature as an illusion. This skillful way of understanding things is what is known as having a skilled approach to skandhas.

11.­58

“Moreover, the skandhas are what is known as the world, and the world is characterized by the fact that it is destroyed. That which is the essential nature of the world is the essential nature of the skandhas. What is the essential nature of the world? It is by nature impermanent, and it is by nature suffering. This, too, is the nature of the skandhas. This skillful way of understanding things is what is known as having a skilled approach to the skandhas. This is how the bodhisatva who has a skilled approach to the skandhas practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­59

“What does it mean, then, to have a skilled approach to the elements? The element of phenomena is the earth element, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of firmness. The element of phenomena is the water element, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of fluidity. The element of phenomena is the fire element, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of heat. The element of phenomena is the wind element, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of movement. The element of phenomena is the element of eye consciousness, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of visibility. The element of phenomena is the element of the ear consciousness, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of hearing. The element of phenomena is the element of the nose consciousness, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of smelling. The element of phenomena is the element of the tongue consciousness, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of tasting. The element of phenomena is the element of the physical consciousness, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of touching. The element of phenomena is the element of the mental consciousness, but the element of phenomena does not have the essential characteristic of experiencing.

11.­60

“The element of self and the element of phenomena are the same. The element of the realm of desire, the element of the realm of form, and the element of the formless realm are the same. The element of cyclic existence and the element of nirvāṇa are the same. [F.166.b]

11.­61

“In this way, the element of space and the element of all phenomena are the same. This is the sameness of being the same as emptiness. It is the sameness of being the same as changelessness. These statements, which have been made in order to help one relate to the element of the conditioned and to the element of the unconditioned, are unfathomable, and someone who investigates things by approaching the elements in this way is known as someone who has a skilled approach to the elements. This is how a bodhisatva, a great being who has a skilled approach to the elements, practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­62

“What is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to the sense fields like? This eye is empty of a self and an owner, and the bodhisatva knows that this is how it is: ‘This is the nature of the eye.’ This is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to the sense fields. [MS.120.b] Likewise, the ear, the nose, the tongue, the body, and the mind are empty of a self and of an owner, and the bodhisatva knows that this is how it is, and so forth: ‘This is the nature of the mind.’

11.­63

“He does not engage in the building up of stocks of wholesome qualities, accumulating them and piling them up by means of the sense fields, and he does not make any distinction between wholesome and unwholesome qualities. This is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to the sense fields.

11.­64

“Although he observes the eye and forms dispassionately, thinking, ‘This is the sense field of the eye, this is the sense field of form,’ he does not reify this dispassion. This is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to the sense fields. Although he thinks, ‘This is the sense field of the ear, of sound, of the nose, of smell, of the tongue, of taste, of the body, of touch, of the mind, of mental phenomena,’ when he observes the mind and mental phenomena with dispassion, he does not reify this dispassion. This is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to the sense fields. In regard to the sense fields, there are the sense fields of the noble ones and the sense fields of those who are not noble ones. In this context, the sense fields of the noble ones are those that are connected to the path, while the sense fields of those who are not noble ones have no relation to the path. [F.167.a] In this context, the bodhisatva who is established on the path will have great compassion for those sentient beings who do not take the Dharma seriously, and he will not abandon the sense fields that are related to the path. This is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to the sense fields.

11.­65

“What is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to truth? There are four aspects to the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to truth. These are understanding suffering, understanding its source, understanding its cessation, and understanding the path. What does it mean to understand suffering? Understanding suffering means to understand that nothing takes place in the skandhas. What does it mean to understand its source? Understanding the source means to understand that craving is destroyed. What does it mean to understand its cessation? Understanding cessation means to understand that suffering is neither produced nor destroyed. What does it mean to understand the path? Understanding the path means not reifying the teachings on the attainment of sameness. Then, although the bodhisatva sees these four truths with this kind of wisdom, he does not reify it, so that he will be able to bring sentient beings to maturity. This is what is known as a skilled approach to truth.

11.­66

“Moreover, there are three more aspects to his skilled approach to truth. These are the relative truth, the ultimate truth, and the truth of essential characteristics. With regard to the relative truth, anything that is a worldly convention and is communicated by means of syllables, sounds, and terminology is what is known as the relative truth. With regard to the ultimate truth, it is what the mind cannot accommodate, and it also does not involve verbal communication. This is what is known as the ultimate truth. What is the truth of essential characteristics? It is that all essential characteristics come down to one essential characteristic, and this one essential characteristic is that there are no essential characteristics. The bodhisatva never tires of teaching the relative truth, [F.167.b] does not fall into a reification of the ultimate truth, and characterizes the truth of essential characteristics by means of the fact that they have no essential characteristics. This is what is known as a skilled approach to truth.

11.­67

“Moreover, the single truth is without another. It is the truth of cessation. It is a singular truth [MS.121.a] that cannot be elaborated upon, yet still he describes it to sentient beings in order to provide access to this truth. This is what is known as a skilled approach to truth.

11.­68

“Moreover, the five skandhas are suffering. That which has the characteristic of suffering in relation to the five skandhas is what is known as suffering, and when one becomes aware that the character of suffering is the characteristic emptiness, that is what is known as the noble truth of suffering. The view that is concerned with the cause being craving latent in the five skandhas is what is known as the truth of origination, and not involving oneself in reifying, grasping at, or judging this view that it is caused by craving is what is known as the noble truth of origination. That there is cessation, a final elimination of the five skandhas implying a lack of previous origination, a lack of a later transference, and a lack of a present existence, is what is known as the noble truth of cessation. That path, which when followed brings one into contact with the knowledge of suffering, the knowledge of its origin, and the knowledge of its cessation and leads one to attain the knowledge that comes from these three kinds of knowledge, is what is known as the noble truth of the way to the cessation of suffering. Maintaining an investigative approach toward this knowledge of truth, while still taking sentient beings into consideration, is what is known as the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to truth.

11.­69

“Moreover, all feelings are suffering, and to discern feelings and grasp them with the mind is what is known as the noble truth of suffering. In relation to the cause that gives rise to feelings, he understands that cause exactly as it is, and this is what is known as the noble truth of origination. The calming of feelings and the feeling of non-feeling, as well as discerning cessation while not reifying the cessation of feelings, [F.168.a] is what is known as the bodhisatva’s noble truth of the cessation of suffering. Any feelings that function in such a way as to constitute a path, that are in that way like a raft, and that aim neither for feelings nor for a path are what are known as the bodhisatva’s noble truth of the way leading to the cessation of suffering. The kind of realization where one sees the sameness of these four truths, but that is not yet completely purified vision, is what is known as the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to truth.

11.­70

“Moreover, birth is suffering, and the examination of nonbirth is what is known as knowledge of suffering. Birth is dependent on becoming, and the knowledge of becoming and destruction is what is known as knowledge of origination. The knowledge that all birth lacks birth and that it has no cessation, the knowledge of noncessation, is what is known as the knowledge of destruction, of cessation. This kind of exploration, reflection, searching, and investigation, of knowing how to engage, is what is known as knowledge of the path. To pursue this knowledge of truth without ending up fixating on the knowledge of truth is what is known as the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to truth.

“This is how the bodhisatva, the great being who is skilled in truth, practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­71

“What kinds of analytical abilities does the bodhisatva have? The bodhisatva has four kinds of analytical abilities. What are these four kinds of analytical abilities? They are analytical ability in relation to objects, analytical ability in relation to phenomena, analytical ability in relation to language, and analytical ability in relation to eloquence.

11.­72

“What is analytical ability in relation to objects? It is knowing how the statements of the ultimate truth relate to phenomena. It is knowledge of the nondual cause. It is knowledge of conditions. It is knowledge of things coming together. It is knowledge that approaches the limitless. It is knowledge that penetrates dependent origination. It is knowledge of the indivisibility of the totality of phenomena. It is knowledge that engages with the way things actually are. [F.168.b] [MS.121.b] It is knowledge that does not remain at the summit of existence. It is knowledge that recollects emptiness. It is knowledge that considers freedom from attributes. It is knowledge that remains disinterested in goals. It is knowledge that does not construct the unconstructed. It is knowledge that penetrates the one path. It is knowledge that penetrates the fact that there is no being. It is knowledge that penetrates the fact that there is no self. It is knowledge of the single principle of the lack of life force. It is knowledge of the ultimate truth that there is no person. It is knowledge that is not bogged down in the past. It is knowledge that has no limit in the future. It is knowledge that is complete in the present. It is knowledge that relates to the skandhas as illusions. It is knowledge that relates to the elements as being like a poisonous snake. It is knowledge that contemplates the empty nature of the sense fields. It is knowledge where the internal has been pacified. It is knowledge where there is no external wandering. It is knowledge that sees objects and non-objects. It is knowledge that is based on mindfulness. It is knowledge that pursues realization. It is knowledge that is immediately present in the mind. It is knowledge that directly experiences truth. It is knowledge that there is no encounter with suffering. It is knowledge that there is no formation of origination. It is knowledge that there are no essential characteristics of cessation. It is knowledge that there is liberation on the path. It is knowledge of how words are applied to phenomena. It is knowledge that penetrates the faculties. It is knowledge that has powers that are unbreakable. It is knowledge that is settled in calm abiding meditation. It is knowledge that has the clarity of insight meditation. It is knowledge of the delusive nature of illusions. It is knowledge of the confused nature of mirages. It is knowledge of the falsity of appearances in dreams. It is knowledge of how echoes appear based on conditions. It is knowledge of how reflections shift. It is knowledge that sees one characteristic among the many characteristics. It is knowledge that sees meetings as partings. It is knowledge that what has been pacified will not reemerge. It is knowledge of how to follow instructions in the Śrāvakayāna. It is knowledge of how conditions are penetrated, and knowledge of the superiority of seclusion in the Pratyekabuddhayāna. [F.169.a] It is knowledge of all the roots of virtue that are accumulated through the Mahāyāna. This is what is known as the bodhisatva’s analytical ability in relation to objects.

11.­73

“Moreover, analytical ability in relation to objects means relying on the meaning. It is to regard the actual nature of all phenomena, and that alone, as the meaning that one should rely on. How is this to be done? All phenomena without exception are empty, and emptiness is the meaning of the object. All phenomena without exception are free from attributes, and being free from attributes is the meaning of the object. All phenomena without exception are free from aspirations, and being free from aspirations is the meaning of the object. All phenomena without exception are dispersed, and being dispersed is the meaning of the object. All phenomena without exception have no being, no life force, and no person, and having no person is the meaning of the object. Realizing that this is what phenomena are like is what is known as analytical ability in relation to objects. To teach this meaning is to teach the impossible. It is to teach the imperishable. Analytical ability points out the meaning that has been realized. It is what the lords, the buddhas, confirm and rejoice in. It is real, essential, and nothing else. It is well founded on wisdom. It is completely irreproachable. This is what is known as the bodhisatva’s analytical ability in relation to objects.

11.­74

“What is analytical ability in relation to phenomena? It is the knowledge of how to relate to mental objects. With respect to the wholesome and the unwholesome, the reproachable and the irreproachable, the defiled and the undefiled, the worldly and the transcendent, the conditioned and the unconditioned, the corrupt and that which is conducive to purification, and cyclic existence and nirvāṇa, it is the knowledge that sees these as the same from the perspective of the totality of phenomena, it is the knowledge of sameness from the perspective of awakening, and it is the knowledge of sameness inherent in the elements. This is what is known as analytical ability in relation to phenomena.

11.­75

“Furthermore, analytical ability in relation to phenomena [F.169.b] is the knowledge that is able to relate to a mind that is acting out of desire. It can relate to acts of constructed desire, acts of strong desire, acts of weak desire, acts of unyielding desire, [MS.122.a] acts of desire in the past,126 acts of desire that seem to have no end, and acts of desire that arise due to conditions in the present. It can relate to the acts of desire of sentient beings whose desire is directed inward and who have no desire directed outward, those whose desire is directed outward and who have no desire directed inward, those who have no desire directed inward and have no desire directed outward, those who have desire directed both inward and outward, those who have desire for form but no desire for sound, those who have desire for sound but no desire for form, those who have desire for neither sound nor form, those who have desire for both sound and form, those who have no desire for smell, those who have desire for smell but no desire for touch, those who have desire for touch but no desire for taste, those who have desire for taste but no desire for form, and those who have desire for form but no desire for smell. In this way, then, there are twenty-one thousand ways of relating to acts of desire, twenty-one thousand ways of relating to acts of anger, twenty-one thousand ways of relating to acts of confusion, and twenty-one thousand ways of relating to acts that are a combination of these. This knowledge is a knowledge that can relate to the mind that acts in these eighty-four thousand different ways. It is the knowledge that can steer one onto the right course. It is the knowledge of how to teach neither too much nor too little. It is the knowledge that goes beyond passion. It is the knowledge that can identify the kind of person one is teaching. It is the knowledge of how to teach in circumstances where it will not go to waste. This is what is known as analytical ability in relation to phenomena.

11.­76

“What is analytical ability in relation to language? It is the knowledge that relates to all language as non-language. [F.170.a] It is the ability to teach the Dharma in the kind of language that is appropriate for sentient beings who have been born into the five states of existence‍—the language of gods, the language of nāgas, the language of yakṣas, the language of gandharvas, the language of kinnaras, the language of mahoragas, the language of human beings, or the language of nonhuman beings. This is what is meant by analytical ability in relation to language.

11.­77

“Teachings must be structured in a suitable way. Teachings must make connections in a suitable way. Teachings must be committed to writing using suitable letters.

11.­78

“Analytical ability in relation to language is to know the singular form of the word, to know the dual form of the word, and to know the plural form of the word. It is to know the feminine words, to know the masculine words, and to know the neuter words. It is to know concise expressions, to know elaborate expressions, and to know colloquial expressions. It is to know the past tense of the word, to know the future tense of the word, and to know the present tense of the word. It is to know what is implied by one syllable, and what is implied by many syllables. This is what is meant by analytical ability in relation to language.

11.­79

“Moreover, analytical ability in relation to language is such that there are no mistakes, there is no repetition, and there is no haste. There is clarity.127 It yields expressions that help clarify the meaning of things. It is language that will please any assembly. It is varied and profound, and it reveals profound meaning. It is adorned with both the relative and the ultimate truth. It is based on the knowledge of what one sees with one’s own mind. It is confirmed by the buddhas. It delights all sentient beings. This is what is known [MS.122.b] as analytical ability in relation to language.

11.­80

“What is the bodhisatva’s analytical ability in relation to eloquence? It is elegant expression. It is statements delivered in a flexible manner. It is teaching without taking a break. It is being agile in one’s eloquence. It is being swift and mobile in one’s eloquence. It is being unencumbered in one’s eloquence. It is being able to address any question. It is eloquence that is never given up. It is unassailable eloquence. It is indisputable eloquence. It is eloquence that rejoices in the Dharma. It is eloquence that is founded on patience. It is profound eloquence. It is a multifaceted eloquence. It is being eloquent when talking about both the relative truth and the ultimate truth. It is eloquence that is founded on generosity, morality, patient acceptance, vigor, meditation, and wisdom. It is being eloquent about the foundations of mindfulness. It is proper renunciation. It is [F.170.b] the foundations of magical abilities. It is the faculties. It is the powers. It is the factors of awakening. It is the path. It is calm abiding and insight meditation. It is being eloquent about the knowledge of how to engage with all the liberative meditative states, the attainments of concentration, and the truths. It is being eloquent about all the paths. It is being eloquent about all the mental activity of sentient beings. It is an eloquence without unintelligent words. It is an eloquence without rough words. It is an eloquence without confused words. It is an eloquence without harsh words. It is an eloquence that uses tender words, pure words, liberating words, unimpeded words, pleasing words, words with correct syntax, words applied in a meaningful context, unimpaired words, sweet words, soft words, blameless words, and words praised by the noble ones. The Dharma is taught to other sentient beings and other people with words that lead to it being recognized in endless buddha fields, with a voice that sounds just like the melodious voice of Brahmā, and with eloquent expressions that are confirmed by the buddhas. Someone who follows these teachings on the Dharma will truly destroy suffering. This is what is known as the bodhisatva’s analytical abilities in relation to eloquence.

11.­81

“This is the bodhisatva’s skill in eloquence, and a bodhisatva who is skilled in eloquence in these ways practices the perfection of wisdom. [B18]

11.­82

“What is a bodhisatva’s skilled approach to relying on things? There are four things bodhisatvas rely on. What are these four things they rely on? They rely on the meaning and not on the letter, on knowledge and not on consciousness, on the explicit meaning of the sūtras and not the implicit meaning, and on the Dharma itself and not on the person teaching it.

11.­83

“Now, what is the meaning and what is the letter? The letter refers to involvement in mundane activities, while the meaning refers to a realization of the reality that transcends the world. [F.171.a] [MS.123.a] The letter refers to teachings on generosity, discipline, restraint, and contentment, while the meaning refers to teachings on being disciplined, on calm abiding, and on what is not new and has no precedent. The letter refers to the generally agreed-upon explanations of cyclic existence, while the meaning refers to accomplishing that which cannot be experienced. The letter refers to the well-known benefits of nirvāṇa, while the meaning refers to the state beyond constructions that is the complete nirvāṇa naturally present in phenomena. The letter refers to teaching according to the respective vehicles, while the meaning refers to the knowledge that realizes the Dharma of the single path. The letter refers to the teaching on not abandoning any sentient beings, while the meaning refers to the purity of the three spheres of existence. The letter refers to the teachings on disciplining one’s body, speech, and mind, as well as to taking up the training in its entirety, and the qualities of purification, while the meaning refers to the purity of unconditionality, not apprehending body, speech, or mind. The letter refers to teachings on the destruction of malice, harshness, anger, pride, haughtiness, and arrogance and on patient acceptance and gentleness, while the meaning refers to the attainment of a patient acceptance of the fact that phenomena are unborn. The letter refers to teachings on all the different ways of applying vigor with regard to the roots of virtue, while the meaning refers to vigor that is not based on striving after anything or leaving anything behind. The letter refers to teachings on the liberative meditative states and the attainments of concentration, while the meaning refers to the knowledge that lies in cessation. The letter refers to the root of wisdom, which is the ability to retain all learning, while the meaning refers to the object that is beyond description. The letter refers to the elucidation of the thirty-seven elements that are conducive to awakening, while the meaning refers to the manifestation of the fruits of these thirty-seven elements that are conducive to awakening. The letter refers to the elucidation of suffering, [F.171.b] its origin, and the path, while the meaning refers to the realization of cessation. The letter refers to the elucidation of the sequence that begins with ignorance and ends with aging and death, while the meaning refers to the cessation of ignorance, the cessation of aging and death, and the cessation of everything in between. The letter refers to teachings on the prerequisites of calm abiding and insight meditation, while the meaning refers to the knowledge of awareness and liberation. The letter refers to teachings given for those who act out of desire, anger, confusion, or a combination of them, while the meaning refers to the unperturbed liberation of the mind. The letter refers to the elucidation of all obscurations, while the meaning refers to liberated unobscured knowledge. The letter refers to expressions of praise of the unlimited good qualities of the Three Jewels, while the meaning refers to the attainment of the actual state that is beyond desire, and the unconditioned good qualities of the Saṅgha. The letter refers to descriptions of the bodhisatva’s training and his development of good qualities, from the time when the awakening mind first arose in him until the time when he sat on the seat of awakening, while the meaning refers to the perfect awakening of omniscient knowledge that takes place in the space of a single moment of thought. In short, whatever is included in the teachings of the eighty-four thousand collections of the Dharma is what is known as the letter, while the object that cannot be expressed by means of any kind of language, any syllables, or any letters, is the meaning.

11.­84

“What are the sūtras that have an implicit meaning? They express the letter, and one should be careful to note that that is the way they present the matter. What are the sūtras that have an explicit meaning? [MS.123.b] They express the meaning, and one should be careful to recognize that that is the way they present the matter. They are known as the sūtras that have an explicit meaning.

11.­85

“What about relying on the Dharma and not on the person teaching it? The implicit meaning is the meaning of the person, and it is not to be relied upon. The explicit meaning is the actual way of things just as they are, and this is to be relied upon. [F.172.a]

11.­86

“These are the four things bodhisatvas rely on, and a bodhisatva, a great being, who is skilled in how to rely on these things practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­87

“What is the bodhisatvas’ skilled approach to the letter? The bodhisatva is skilled in two things as he practices the perfection of wisdom. What are these two things? He is skilled in consciousness and he is skilled in knowledge.

11.­88

“What is consciousness and what is knowledge in this context? Consciousness refers to the four modes of consciousness. What are these four modes of consciousness? They are the position consciousness takes when it is involved with form, along with the positions it takes when it is involved with feeling, perception, and mental conditioning. This is what is meant by consciousness. What is knowledge? It is a complete comprehension of the fact that the skandha of knowledge is not based in the five skandhas of grasping.128 This is what is meant by knowledge.

11.­89

“Furthermore, consciousness is to be conscious of the earth element, of the water element, of the fire element, and of the wind element. This is what is known as consciousness. Knowledge of the unbreakable totality of phenomena, the knowledge that is not based upon the four elements, is what is known as knowledge.

11.­90

“Furthermore, what is known as consciousness is the cognitive experience of forms that are recognized by the eye; it is the cognitive experience of sounds that are recognized by the ear, smells that are recognized by the nose, tastes that are recognized by the tongue, physical objects that are recognized by the body, and mental objects that are recognized by the mind. This is what is known as consciousness. Relying on the knowledge where the internal sense fields have come to rest and where there is no movement toward the outer sense fields, where there is no attempt to reach anything, is what is known as knowledge.

11.­91

“Furthermore, what we call consciousness is the conscious experience that arises from the object [F.172.b] and the conscious experience that arises from conceptions. This is what is known as consciousness. When there is no grasping, no conceit, no ideation, and no bewilderment, that is what is known as knowledge.129

11.­92

“Furthermore, consciousness relates to phenomena that are within the sphere of the conditioned, and consciousness cannot approach the unconditioned. Understanding the unconditioned is knowledge.

11.­93

“Furthermore, consciousness is based on arising and ceasing. That which does not arise, does not cease, and does not remain‍—this is knowledge.

11.­94

“Which sūtras are those of explicit meaning, and which sūtras are those of implicit meaning? Those sūtras that provide access to the path are known as implicit. Those sūtras that provide access to the fruits of the path are known as explicit. Those sūtras that bring out the relative truth are known as implicit. Those sūtras that indicate the ultimate truth are known as explicit.

11.­95

“Furthermore, those sūtras that deal with the processes of action are known as implicit. Those sūtras that provide instructions for the elimination of action and the vices are known as explicit.

11.­96

“Furthermore, those sūtras that provide instructions that explain the corruptions are known as implicit. [MS.124.a] Those sūtras that provide instructions for cleansing and purification are known as explicit. Those sūtras that inspire weariness with cyclic existence are known as implicit. Those sūtras that do not have recourse to a distinction130 between cyclic existence and nirvāṇa are known as explicit. Those sūtras that teach by means of a variety of words and expressions are known as implicit. Those sūtras that are profound, difficult to see, and difficult to fathom are known as explicit. Those sūtras that are greatly elaborate in order to delight the minds of sentient beings are known as implicit. Those sūtras that use only a few words and phrases in order to inspire reflection are known as explicit. [F.173.a]

11.­97

“Furthermore, those sūtras that use a variety of terms, such as self, being, life force, person, soul, human being, man, someone who acts, or someone who experiences, describing the absence of agent as the presence of an agent, are known as implicit. Those sūtras that teach by means of emptiness, freedom from attributes, freedom from aspirations, the unarisen, the unborn, nonoccurring, nonbeing, no person, and freedom from the three times are known as explicit.

11.­98

“What is meant by Dharma and what is meant by the person teaching it? Applying oneself to any Dharma teaching while maintaining a view of the person is what is known as relying on the person. That the true state of things concerning the entity of a person, that it is in fact based on wrong view, is the totality of phenomena‍—that is what is known as the Dharma.131

11.­99

“Furthermore, saying, ‘a person, a common person, a common outstanding person, a person who follows his conviction, a person who follows the Dharma, a person on the eighth-lowest stage, a person who is a stream enterer, a person who is a once-returner, a person who is a non-returner, a person who is an arhat, a person who is a pratyekabuddha, a person who is a bodhisatva, or a person who takes birth in the world for the benefit of the many, for the happiness of the many, for the love of the world, and for the welfare, benefit, and happiness of a great host of beings, of gods and men, and becomes a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished buddha’‍—using the term person in all these ways, the tathāgata uses the relative truth in order to engage with sentient beings and to teach them. It is said, though, that those who have any manifest attachment to these concepts have nothing to rely upon. In order to provide them with something to rely upon the Lord said, ‘Rely on the Dharma itself and not on the person teaching it.’

11.­100

“What, then, is the Dharma itself? It is that which is unchanging; that which is not a fabrication; that which is not created; that which is not modified; that which does not remain; that which has no foundation; that which has no root; that which is complete sameness; [F.173.b] that which is the same as sameness, the same as non-sameness, and the same as both sameness and non-sameness; that which is nonconceptual; that which is free from application; [MS.124.b] that which is definitive;132 that which is not attained;133 and that which is the complete absence of anything that could be characterized as an autonomous nature. This is what is known as the Dharma itself.

11.­101

“Those who rely on the Dharma itself in this way, and who do not put their trust in the elements, have entered the door to the path of the Dharma. For them, all phenomena134 become just like the Dharma itself, and any phenomenon can then be used as a support. This is what is known as the four things bodhisatvas rely on, and the bodhisatva who is skilled in relying on these things practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­102

“What is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to accumulation? There are two things bodhisatvas accumulate. What are these two things? They are merit and knowledge. What is the accumulation of merit? It is the item of merit that is created through generosity, the item of merit that is created through morality, and the item of merit that is created through meditative cultivation. It is to remain in a mental state of love and to get involved out of compassion. It is to apply oneself to all the roots of virtue and to confession of one’s own evils and those of others. It is the item of merit that is created through rejoicing in all the roots of virtue of all sentient beings throughout the three times, of all those who are learning and who have no more to learn, of all pratyekabuddhas, of those who are newly committed, of those who are engaged in practice, of those whose progress is irreversible, and of those who have only one birth remaining, the item of merit that is created through rejoicing in those who have committed themselves, the lords, the buddhas, of the past, the future, and the present. It is the item of merit created through requesting the Dharma from all the buddhas and all the noble ones. It is the item of merit created through dedicating all one’s roots of virtue to awakening. It is to inspire the arising of the mind of awakening in all those in whom the mind of awakening has not yet arisen. [F.174.a] It is to teach the path of the perfections to those in whom the mind of awakening has arisen, and to collect material wealth for the poor. It is to provide medicine for sick, to treat them with respect, and to accept those who are in a wretched state with no hesitation. It is to not conceal one’s failings and to confess what one has done wrong. It is to serve and revere, in many different ways, the lords, the buddhas, of the present who have reached final nirvāṇa. It is to respect the gurus and preceptors as spiritual friends. It is to search vigorously for the priceless, invaluable teachings. It is to show affection for those who preach the Dharma and to still thirst to listen to the Dharma even after one has traveled for a hundred yojanas. It is to teach the Dharma without any thought of material gain. It is to serve one’s parents. It is to show gratitude. It is to be grateful. It is to have no regrets and to not be satisfied with the merit one has accrued. It is to guard one’s physical conduct and not act in a hypocritical manner. It is to guard one’s speech and not speak in a hypocritical manner. It is to guard one’s mind and not think hypocritical thoughts. It is to establish monuments in honor of tathāgatas, which brings one as much merit as is possessed by Brahmā. It is to perform boundless acts of worship that lead one to attain the perfect characteristics [MS.125.a] and to gather the accumulations of various roots of virtue that lead one to attain the perfect characteristics. It is to ornament one’s body with the absence of conceit. It is to ornament one’s speech with the relinquishment of all wicked speech. It is to ornament the mind with an unimpeded intellect. It is to ornament the buddha realms with acts of transformation by using one’s superior abilities. It is to ornament the qualities of the Dharma with the purity of knowledge. It is to ornament assemblies with abstention from slander, harsh words, and divisive talk. It is to ornament the Dharma of nonattachment by upholding the Dharma. [F.174.b] It is to contribute to the presentation of Dharma not being ruined by offering encouragement that brings delight. It is to provide effective teachings by removing obscurations and hindrances and by listening to the Dharma respectfully. It is to ornament the tree of awakening by offering groves and to ornament the seat of awakening by not relinquishing the mind of awakening, the mind that precedes all roots of virtue. It is to purify birth and death by not objectifying actions and the vices. It is to have a hand of wealth by giving away all one’s precious valuable objects and to make one’s wealth inexhaustible by increasing it through the inexhaustible act of dedicating.

11.­103

“He displays no angry demeanor, and so he enjoys the open hearts, smiling faces, and pleasant conversation of all sentient beings. He radiates the same light on all sentient beings, and so he attains the adornment of sameness. He does not leave those who lack learning in darkness and emits an array of light. His morality and his merit prosper, and so his births become pure. He does not present arguments to try to excuse his failures, and so the womb is purified. He maintains the purity of the ten wholesome forms of conduct, and so he is reborn as a god or a human being. He observes all the guidelines, and so he attains unfaltering determination. He is not a teacher who holds back any teachings, and so he becomes a lord of the Dharma. His motivation is pure and excellent, and so the whole world becomes available to him. He does not settle for limited forms of conduct but places his confidence in the vastness of the Dharma. By not abandoning the mind of omniscience, he takes up all meritorious kinds of action. Impelled by faith, he perfects the seven kinds of riches. He honors his previous commitments, and so he does not deceive anyone in the world. He perfects the wholesome forms of conduct, and so he perfects all the teachings of the Buddha. This is what is known as the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to accumulation.

11.­104

“What is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to the accumulation of knowledge? Knowledge comes about on the basis of a particular cause, and there are different causes and conditions through which knowledge is attained. What are these causes? [F.175.a] What are these conditions? They are to have a strong desire to search for the Dharma; to follow a friend who has attained knowledge; to rely on the knowledge of buddhas and not to rely on the knowledge of śrāvakas or pratyekabuddhas; to not to entertain any pride with respect to these things; and to have affection for one’s guru, to have affection for one’s teacher.

11.­105

“When his spiritual friends have concluded that he has the necessary motivation, they will not withhold any instructions in knowledge. When they see that he is a suitable vessel for it, they will not hesitate to teach him the Dharma attentively. When he learns the Dharma in this way, he applies himself to accumulating the Dharma, and someone who applies himself to accumulating the Dharma is someone who applies himself to accumulating knowledge.

11.­106

“What does it mean to apply oneself to accumulating the Dharma? It is to have few possessions, to have few tasks, and not to be overly talkative,135 to be of few words. [MS.125.b] It is to maintain the practice of staying awake late at night and rising early in the morning. It is to reflect on the meaning of what one has encountered, to search more and more deeply for it, and to keep one’s mind free from confusion. It is to cast off one’s obscurations, to know how to resolve one’s failures, to be without regret, to not be overwhelmed, and to maintain solid progress. It is to delve into the Dharma, to be open to the Dharma, to be inclined toward the Dharma, and to be diligent in the Dharma. It is to always act as if one’s clothes and hair were on fire. It is to search for knowledge and to remain in that very state. It is to not be lax and to not abandon one’s regular practice. It is to seek seclusion, to isolate oneself from society, to enjoy solitude, to reflect on the joys of retreat, and to delight in the noble family. It is to never stray from pure conduct, to find pleasure and satisfaction in the joyful Dharma, to not honor the sayings of the materialists, and to not lose one’s focus on the search for the transcendental Dharma. It is to have realization that is true to the meaning, to have a mind that remains loyal to the path, to keep firmly to one’s conviction, and to maintain an understanding of conditions. It is to ornament oneself with conscience and moral sensitivity, [F.175.b] to be in harmony with the realization of the Buddha, to have rid oneself of ignorance, to have cleared away the veil of ignorance and delusion, and to have purified the eye of wisdom. It is to have a perfectly pure intellect, to have a broad intellect, to have an intellect that is not narrow, and to have an intellect that makes clear distinctions. It is to have the knowledge that sees directly, to have good qualities that are not dependent on others, to not be conceited about one’s own good qualities, and to recognize the good qualities of others. It is to perform good actions, to not obstruct the ripening of the fruits of one’s previous actions, and to understand the purification of actions. This is what is known as the accumulation of knowledge of the bodhisatva, the great being.

11.­107

“Furthermore, when it comes to the accumulation of knowledge, there are four kinds of generosity: providing teachers of the Dharma with birch bark, reed pencils, ink, and books; providing teachers of the Dharma with various kinds of seats for teaching the Dharma; providing teachers of the Dharma with all kinds of gain, honor, and praise; and providing teachers of the Dharma with unfeigned praise to encourage them in the Dharma. These are the four kinds of generosity that enable the accumulation of knowledge.

11.­108

“There are four kinds of protection that enable the accumulation of knowledge. What are these four kinds of protection? They are protecting the bodies of the teachers of the Dharma, protecting their wholesome conduct, protecting them as they travel through different regions and countries, and protecting the things that aid them. These are the four kinds of protection.

11.­109

“There are four kinds of support that enable the accumulation of knowledge. What are these four kinds of support? They are supporting the teachers of the Dharma with the Dharma, supporting their knowledge, supporting them with material objects, and supporting their awakening.

11.­110

“There are five powers that enable the accumulation of knowledge. What are these five powers? They are the power of faith that comes from conviction, the power of vigor that comes from one’s search for learning, the power of mindfulness that comes from one’s recollection of the mind of awakening, the power of concentration that comes from one’s contemplation of the Dharma of sameness, and the power of wisdom that comes from the power of learning. These are the five powers that enable the accumulation of knowledge. [F.176.a]

11.­111

“There are four kinds of discipline that enable the accumulation of knowledge. What are these four kinds of discipline? They are the discipline of honoring the Dharma, the discipline of seeking the Dharma, the discipline of reflecting on the Dharma, and the discipline of dedicating oneself to awakening. These are the four kinds of discipline that enable the accumulation of knowledge.

11.­112

“There are four kinds of patient acceptance that enable the accumulation of knowledge. What are these four kinds of patient acceptance? They are to patiently endure verbal abuse and unpleasant remarks in one’s eager pursuit of the Dharma, to patiently endure wind, sun, cold, heat, hunger, and thirst in one’s eager pursuit of the Dharma, to obey one’s teachers and preceptors in one’s eager pursuit of the Dharma, [MS.126.a] and to accept the teachings on emptiness, freedom from attributes, and freedom from aspirations in one’s eager pursuit of the Dharma. These are the four kinds of patient acceptance that enable the accumulation of knowledge.

11.­113

“There are four kinds of vigor that enable the accumulation of knowledge. What are these four kinds of vigor? They are vigor in learning, vigor in remembering, vigor in teaching, and vigor in making progress. These are the four kinds of vigor that enable the accumulation of knowledge.

11.­114

“There are four aspects of meditation that enable the accumulation of knowledge. What are these four aspects of meditation? They are dwelling in seclusion, delighting in solitude, pursuing knowledge and the superior abilities, and engaging with the knowledge of the Buddha. These are the four aspects of meditation that enable the accumulation of knowledge.

11.­115

“There are four manifestations of wisdom that enable the accumulation of knowledge. What are these four manifestations of wisdom? They are not ending up in annihilation, not insisting on permanence, not refuting dependent origination, and being favorably disposed to the lack of self. These are the four manifestations of wisdom that enable the accumulation of knowledge. [F.176.b]

11.­116

“There are four things that enable the accumulation of the knowledge of skillful means. What are these four things? They are being in harmony with the world, being in harmony with the sūtras, being in harmony with the Dharma, and being in harmony with knowledge. These are the four things that enable the accumulation of the knowledge of skillful means.

11.­117

“There are four ways to engage with the knowledge of the accumulations of the path. What are these four ways? They are the path of the perfections, the path of the elements that are conducive to awakening, the eightfold path, and the path that leads to the knowledge of omniscience. These are the four ways to engage with the knowledge of the accumulations of the path.

11.­118

“There are four kinds of thirst that enable the accumulation of knowledge. What are these four kinds of thirst? They are thirst for learning, thirst for teaching, thirst for investigation, and thirst for knowledge. These are the four kinds of thirst that enable the accumulation of knowledge.

11.­119

“Furthermore, the accumulation of knowledge is being in harmony with all sentient beings and being in harmony with all buddha fields. It should be noted that the accumulation of knowledge follows from generosity. It should be noted that the accumulation of knowledge follows from morality, patient acceptance, vigor, meditation, wisdom, love, compassion, empathetic joy, and equanimity. Why is this? Any task a bodhisatva undertakes rests on knowledge, is preceded by knowledge, and is supported by knowledge. As it is based on knowledge, it becomes a support for omniscience. No māras are able to penetrate it. One attains the blessings of the buddhas. One reaches the knowledge of omniscience.

11.­120

“This is the bodhisatva’s accumulation of merit and his accumulation of knowledge, and with skill in these two kinds of accumulation, the bodhisatva, the great being, practices the perfection of wisdom. [F.177.a]

11.­121

“What is the bodhisatvas’ skilled approach to the foundations of mindfulness? There are four foundations of mindfulness to cultivate. What are these four foundations of mindfulness? [MS.126.b] They are using the body to cultivate mindfulness by observing the body, using feelings to cultivate mindfulness by observing feelings, using the mind to cultivate mindfulness by observing the mind, and using phenomena to cultivate mindfulness by observing phenomena.

11.­122

“How does one use the body to cultivate mindfulness by observing the body? Śāriputra, a bodhisatva dwells using his body to observe his body. He contemplates what the body used to be like, how the body will end up, and what the body is like in the present, ‘Alas, this body arises from delusion. It originates from causes and conditions. It is helpless, passive, ownerless, and cannot be kept. External things like grass, bushes, herbs, and forests come about on the basis of causes and conditions. They are ownerless, and they cannot be kept, and this body is just the same. It is like grass, plaster, wood, dirt, or a statue. It consists of the skandhas, the elements, and the sense fields. It is empty of a self, of an owner, of permanence, of stability, of durability, of anything that does not change. There is no ownership to be found in this body. Nonetheless, by using this insubstantial body, we can find something of substance. What is this? It is the body of the tathāgata. With the body of the tathāgata we will attain the Dharma body, the vajra body, the unbreakable body, the body of firmness, the body that is distinguished throughout the whole of the threefold world. Even though this body of mine is defiled by many faults, it can still be used to attain the body of the tathāgata, which is free from all faults.’

11.­123

“Impelled by this thorough investigation, he maintains his body that is based on the principal elements, and being conscious of the benefits of doing so, he thinks, [F.177.b] ‘I will let this body expire if that will be of any use to sentient beings. The four principle external elements‍—the earth element, the water element, the fire element, and the wind element‍—act as sustenance for sentient beings in various different ways, by means of various different kinds of objects, in many ways, using many kinds of tools. They can be used in various different ways. In just the same way, may this bundle of mine, which consists of the four principal elements, act as sustenance for sentient beings in various different ways, by means of various different kinds of objects, in many ways, using many kinds of tools. May it be used in various different ways.’ The impermanence of the body is evident to him, yet birth, death, and rebirth do not leave him feeling dejected. The suffering of the body is evident to him, yet he does not let the suffering of the body bring him down. It is evident to him that the body has no self, yet in order to bring sentient beings to maturity, he does not allow himself to become dejected. The peacefulness of the body is evident to him, yet the peacefulness of the body does not leave him apathetic. The emptiness of the body and the isolation of the body is evident to him, yet he does not fall into the views of an isolationist.

11.­124

“He dwells on the body and observes the body, and he does not find any essence or substance to it. He dwells on the internal body and observes the body, and he does not allow room for the vices to remain inside him. He dwells on the external body and observes the body, and he does not remain connected to the external vices. Having freed his body from the corruptions, his bodily actions are purified. His purified body [MS.127.a] attains the physical ornaments of the characteristics, and his ornamented body attracts the recognition of gods and men. This is how the bodhisatva uses the body to cultivate mindfulness by observing the body.

11.­125

“How does one use feelings to cultivate mindfulness by observing feelings? [F.178.a] The bodhisatva will think, ‘Any feeling whatsoever one may have is suffering.’ With this insight into feelings he can experience pleasant feelings with an understanding of knowledge, an understanding of wisdom, and an understanding of means, and not pursue the tendency toward attachment. When he experiences painful feelings, he develops great compassion for all those born into lower states of existence, and he does not pursue the tendency toward anger. When he experiences feelings that are neither painful nor pleasant, he experiences feelings that are neither painful nor pleasant, but he nonetheless does not pursue the tendency toward ignorance. He pays attention to his feelings with mindfulness, and whether he experiences feelings that are pleasant, feelings that are painful, or feelings that are neither pleasant nor painful, his view is free from these feelings. He takes it upon himself to understand and alleviate the feelings of all sentient beings: ‘These sentient beings do not know how to be free from their feelings. They are overjoyed by pleasant feelings, distressed by painful feelings, and indifferent to feelings that are neither painful nor pleasant. How sad! As we have alleviated all feelings by applying wisdom and knowledge when we experience feelings and have combined this with the application of skillful means and great compassion, we will take it upon ourselves to instruct them in the Dharma so that all the feelings of these sentient beings may be alleviated.’

11.­126

“Why is it that we call them feelings? A feeling that is combined with understanding leads to pleasure, while a feeling that is combined with a lack of understanding leads to pain. What does it mean to combine a feeling with understanding? It means that there is nothing there that feels‍—no self, no being, no life force, and no person. Feeling is attachment. Feeling is appropriation. Feeling is grasping. Feeling is misunderstanding. Feeling is conceptualization. Feeling is the tendency to see. Feeling is the perceptions of the eye, and so forth, up to and including the perceptions of the mind. Feeling is the perception of form, [F.178.b] and so forth, up to and including the perception of mental objects. Feeling is what arises from contact with the eye, feelings that are referred to as either painful, pleasant, or neither painful nor pleasant. Internal and external phenomena can be added here as before. Feeling is what arises from contact with the mind, feelings that are referred to as either painful, pleasant, or neither painful nor pleasant.

11.­127

“Moreover, feeling can be enumerated: Feeling is singular; it is the perception of a single mental event. Feeling is twofold; it is the internal and the external. Feeling is threefold; it is the perception of the past, the perception of the future, and the perception of the present. Feeling is fourfold; it is the perception of the four elements. Feeling is fivefold; it is to conceive of the five skandhas. Feeling is sixfold; it is the idea of the six sense fields. Feeling is sevenfold; it is the seven states of consciousness. Feeling is eightfold; it is the eight mistaken kinds of engagement. Feeling is ninefold; it is the nine abodes of sentient beings. Feeling is tenfold; it is [MS.127.b] the ten wholesome forms of conduct. This enumeration could be continued.

11.­128

“Everything is feeling. Any kind of object or mental process will be experienced as feeling. This is why it is said that there are immeasurably many sentient beings with immeasurably many kinds of feelings, and the bodhisatva who dwells with feelings and observes his feelings develops the knowledge of how the feelings of all sentient beings arise, remain, and cease. This is the knowledge of the feelings of all sentient beings, of wholesome and unwholesome feelings. This is what is known as the bodhisatva’s foundation of mindfulness that involves observing feelings.

11.­129

“Now, how does the bodhisatva practice the foundation of mindfulness of the mind by observing the mind? The bodhisatva is not absent-minded but is careful, conscientious, and undistracted, and he reflects carefully: ‘The mind appears and then disperses and dissolves. It does not remain. It does not dwell inside, [F.179.a] nor does it proceed to anywhere outside. The initial thought that I gave rise to has vanished. It has disappeared. It has changed. It is not situated in any particular place. It is not facing in any particular direction. It cannot be ascertained. The thought that led to a root of virtue being established has vanished. It has disappeared. It has changed. It is not situated in any particular place. It is not facing in any particular direction. The mind that is dedicated to awakening essentially has no characteristics. The mind cannot know the mind. The mind cannot see the mind. The mind cannot experience the mind. What, then, is this mind? Is it that through which I will realize unsurpassed perfect awakening? There is no relationship between the mind of awakening and the mind of the roots of virtue. There is no relationship between the mind of the roots of virtue and the mind that is dedicated to awakening. There is no relationship between the mind that is dedicated to awakening and the mind of awakening or the mind of the roots of virtue.’ In this way he reflects with no discomfort, with no fear, without becoming afraid.

11.­130

“He also thinks, ‘Dependent origination is a profound topic. Causes and their effects do not fail to take place. If the actual state of mind represented an inherent nature of the mind, then the dependence of all phenomena on causes and conditions would be useless, dysfunctional, and powerless. What one wishes for is what one accomplishes, so I will apply myself to what should be accomplished. I will not let this actual state of the mind wither. What is the actual state of the mind, and what is it that is accomplished? The mind is like an illusion; there is no one here who gives. This is the actual state of the mind. Still, when all notions of ownership have been done away with and been transformed into the ornament that is the accomplishment of a buddha field, something has been accomplished. The mind is like a dream; it is characterized by being pacified. This is the actual state of the mind. Still, when one has accumulated all morality and training and transformed it into the superior ability of swiftness,136 something has been accomplished. The mind is like a mirage, entirely transient. That is the actual state of the mind. Still, [F.179.b] when the gentle power of patience has been transformed into the accomplishment that adorns awakening, one has accomplished something. The mind is like the reflection of the moon in a pond, completely disconnected. This is the actual state of the mind. Still, when all one’s efforts have been transformed into that which fulfills all the teachings of the Buddha, one has accomplished something. The mind is ungraspable; it cannot be seen. This is the actual state of the mind. [MS.128.a] Still, when all the liberative meditative states, the attainments of concentration, have been transformed into the concentration of the Buddha, something has been accomplished. The mind is formless; it is imperceptible, unobstructable, and uncognizable. This is the actual state of the mind. Still, when the knowledge of all the various questions that can be raised has been transformed into the perfect knowledge of the Buddha, something has been accomplished. The mind arises in response to various objects. This is the actual state of the mind. Still, when the object of a root of virtue is brought into contact with the mind, one has accomplished something. The mind does not arise without a cause. This is the actual state of the mind. Still, when the mind that is the cause of the elements that are conducive to awakening has been engendered, something has been accomplished. The mind does not arise without any influence. This is the actual state of the mind. Still, when the mind is brought under the influence of the Buddha, something has been accomplished.’ This, Śāriputra, is how the bodhisatva practices the foundation of mindfulness of the mind by observing the mind. As he dwells on the mind and observes the mind, he steers his mind so that he attains the superior abilities. When he has attained the superior abilities, he is able to know all minds by means of one mind, and with this knowledge he teaches the Dharma of the true nature of the mind.

11.­131

“Moreover, as he dwells on the mind and observes the mind, the bodhisatva steers his mind so that he attains great compassion. When he has attained great compassion, he will not tire until all sentient beings have been brought to maturity. As he dwells on the mind and observes the mind, he does not maintain an attitude of wanting to eliminate the mind, of wanting to shut the mind off, [F.180.a] but instead he develops a desire to relate to the workings of cyclic existence. With the knowledge that comes from paying attention to the mind, he arrives at certainty about the fact that there is no birth and no origination, and dwelling in the Dharma in this way, he does not fall to the level of a śrāvaka or a pratyekabuddha. There will still be some clinging to the stream of thoughts as long as he has not developed all the qualities of a buddha, but with the wisdom that arises in that one moment when these qualities are present, unsurpassed perfect awakening is attained. This, Śāriputra, is how the bodhisatva practices the foundation of mindfulness of the mind by observing the mind.

11.­132

“Now, Śāriputra, how does the bodhisatva practice the foundation of mindfulness of phenomena by observing phenomena? Śāriputra, the bodhisatva sees phenomena with the wisdom eye of the noble ones, and he does not become confused by them, even temporarily, while on his way to the seat of awakening. When he dwells observing phenomena in this way, he does not perceive any phenomena, however small, that escape emptiness, that escape freedom from attributes, that escape freedom from aspirations, that escape freedom from origination, that escape freedom from arising, that escape freedom from being conditioned, or that escape freedom from an entity. He does not perceive any phenomena, however small, that escape dependent origination. When he dwells in this observation of phenomena, the bodhisatva perceives truth, and not untruth.

11.­133

“What is truth? It is the fact that there is no self, no being, no life force, and no person. This is what is known as truth. What is untruth? It is the view that there is a self, a being, a life force, or a person. It is the view of annihilation, the view of permanence, the view of existence, and the view of nonexistence. This is what is known as untruth. Thus, Śāriputra, all phenomena are true, [F.180.b] and all phenomena are untrue. How so? When one understands emptiness, freedom from attributes, and freedom from aspirations all phenomena are true. If one tends to think in terms of me and mine, all phenomena are untrue. When the bodhisatva dwells on phenomena and observes phenomena, he does not perceive any phenomena [MS.128.b] that are anything other than the qualities of the Buddha, that do not lead to awakening, that do not lead to buddhahood, that do not lead to the path, that do not lead to liberation, and that do not lead to release. Because he sees all phenomena as release, he attains the kind of great compassion that is called unhindered. He comes to the conclusion that the corruptions of all sentient beings are made up. He reflects, ‘They are not connected with the vices‍—they are beyond the vices.’ How so? Because they genuinely engage with the explicit meaning of things, they do not accumulate the vices, they do not heap them up, and awakening comes about through this realization. The true nature of vices is the true nature of awakening, and the true nature of awakening is the true nature of vices. If one bears in mind that this is the way things are, then one does not, in fact, keep focus or place one’s mindfulness on anything at all. This is the very state of knowing the way things actually are, and this is why the totality of phenomena is referred to as the very state of things. The constant state of the totality of phenomena is the constant state of the element of beings, and the constant state of the element of beings is the constant state of the element of space. This is why it can be said that all phenomena are like space. The bodhisatva who dwells on phenomena and observes phenomena relies upon the truth of the Buddha, and in this he is in fact relating to all phenomena as the truth of the Buddha. He develops the knowledge of destruction, but he does not attain the destruction of the unconditioned. [F.181.a] He attains the knowledge of nonarising, but he still takes birth because of his concern for sentient beings, while not abandoning his ultimate goal of nonbirth.

11.­134

“The foundation of mindfulness of phenomena implies maintaining this mindfulness of all phenomena. It implies maintaining mindfulness of all the designations of phenomena without exception, which are related to the teachings of śrāvakas, pratyekabuddhas, and buddhas, and not forgetting them or becoming confused about them until one has reached the final goal. There are an infinite number of presentations of what we call the foundation of mindfulness of phenomena by observing phenomena. There is no limit to its scope. It comprises all the teachings of the Buddha and has the potential to delight all sentient beings, to overcome all māras, and to arrive at self-arisen realization. This, Śāriputra, is how the bodhisatva practices the foundation of mindfulness of phenomena by observing phenomena.

11.­135

“These are what are known as the four foundations of mindfulness, Śāriputra, and the bodhisatva who is skilled in these four foundations of mindfulness practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­136

“What is the bodhisatvas’ skilled approach to the factors of awakening? There are seven factors of awakening for the bodhisatvas. What are these seven factors? They are the factor of perfect awakening of mindfulness, the factor of perfect awakening of examining the Dharma, the factor of perfect awakening of vigor, the factor of perfect awakening of joy, the factor of perfect awakening of calm, the factor of perfect awakening of concentration, and the factor of perfect awakening of equanimity. These, Śāriputra, are the bodhisatvas’ seven factors of awakening.

11.­137

“What is the factor of perfect awakening of mindfulness? The mindfulness through which phenomena are understood, penetrated, analyzed, investigated, discerned, and examined is the mindfulness that leads to the realization of the essential characteristic of the true nature of phenomena. [F.181.b] What is the knowledge of the essential characteristic of the true nature of phenomena? It is that all phenomena are empty of any essential characteristics of their own. Absorbing this kind of mindfulness is what is known as the factor of perfect awakening of mindfulness.

11.­138

“What is the factor of perfect awakening of examining the Dharma? It is the knowledge of how to examine the eighty-four thousand collections of teachings. The teachings should be examined in an appropriate way: those of explicit meaning according to the explicit meaning, [MS.129.a] those of implicit meaning according to the implicit meaning, those of relative meaning according to the relative meaning, those of ultimate meaning according to the ultimate meaning, designations according to designations, and ascertainment according to ascertainment. To examine the Dharma in this way is what is known as the factor of perfect awakening of examining the Dharma.

11.­139

“What is the factor of perfect awakening of vigor? It is to take joy in this very examination of the Dharma. It is to be calm, concentrated, and equanimous. It is to possess a firm grasp of knowledge, of the power of delight, and of fortitude. It is unyielding determination, stamina, and not shying away from responsibility. It is to apply vigor in order to realize the path. This is what is known as the factor of perfect awakening of vigor.

11.­140

“What is the factor of perfect awakening of joy? It is to take joy in the Dharma, to delight in the Dharma, and to be inspired by the Dharma in a way that brings clarity and removes despondency, an irrepressible joy that leaves the body and the mind at peace and that removes the corruptions. This is what is known as the factor of perfect awakening of joy.

11.­141

“What is the factor of perfect awakening of calm? It is physical calm, mental calm, the calming of corruptions, the absence of the hindrances, and the settling of the mind on an object of concentration. [F.182.a] This is what is known as the factor of perfect awakening of calm.

11.­142

“What is the factor of perfect awakening of concentration? A mind that is settled can attain knowledge of phenomena, while a mind that is not settled cannot. A mind that is settled can attain awakening with respect to phenomena, while a mind that is not settled cannot. It is not the abandoning of the impediments of ingrained views that leads to perfect awakening, but rather the sameness of phenomena, the state of absorption in phenomena. This is what is known as the factor of perfect awakening of concentration.

11.­143

“What is the factor of perfect awakening of equanimity? It is to not adopt an attitude toward things that is either cheerful or depressed. It is to not be carried away by worldly phenomena. It is to remain unmoved by states of elation and dejection, to remain undisturbed by them, not to allow oneself to be interrupted by them, not to be carried away by them, and not to be angered by them, but rather to abide by the noble path. This is what is known as the factor of perfect awakening of equanimity.

11.­144

“In this way, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva who is skilled in these seven factors of awakening practices the perfection of wisdom. [B19]

11.­145

“What is the bodhisatvas’ skilled approach to the path? The path of the bodhisatvas has eight aspects. What are these eight aspects of the path? They are right view, right intention, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right concentration. This is what is known as the eightfold path of the bodhisatvas.

11.­146

“What is right view? It is a noble view that is removed from what is worldly. It is not derived from a view of a self, a view of a being, a view of a life force, or a view of a person. It is not derived from the view of annihilation or permanence, of existence or nonexistence. It is not derived from a view of wholesomeness or unwholesomeness, and so forth. [F.182.b] It is not derived from a view of nirvāṇa. This is what is known as right view.

11.­147

“What is right intention? It is to not cultivate the kind of intentions that lead to vices such as desire, anger, and confusion becoming established. It is to cultivate the kind of intentions that result in morality, concentration, wisdom, liberation, and insight into the knowledge of liberation becoming established. This is what is known as right intention.

11.­148

“What is right speech? It is the kind of speech that does not create pain for oneself or for others and that is full of words that bring benefit. It is speech that leads one to engage with the path of sameness. This is what is known as right speech.

11.­149

“What is right action? [MS.129.b] It is to not engage in negative actions that have negative effects. It is to engage in positive actions that have positive effects. It is to not engage in actions that are a mixture of both positive and negative and that have both positive and negative effects. It is to engage in actions that are a mixture of both positive and negative but have no effects, and that lead to the cessation of action. To focus on one’s own tasks, to trust in action, and to act in appropriate ways is what is known as right action.

11.­150

“What is right livelihood? It is to not abandon the noble lineage, the good qualities of a life of purity. It is to not engage in flattery, hypocrisy, or extortion. It is to be content and easily satisfied. It is to not be lax about one’s commitments. It is to not be envious of others’ possessions and to be content with the possessions one has. It is to be irreproachable and live according to what has been sanctioned by the noble ones. This is what is known as right livelihood.

11.­151

“What is right effort? One should not make the kind of effort that accepts misguided forms of conduct and that tends toward desire, anger, and confusion. [F.183.a] One should make the kind of effort that leads to progress along the noble path and access to truth and that helps one to reach nirvāṇa. This is what is known as right effort.

11.­152

“What is right mindfulness? It is a mindfulness that is skillfully performed, not ordinary; straight, not askew. It is a mindfulness that sees the deficiencies and the faults of cyclic existence and that is a guide on the path to nirvāṇa. It is a mindfulness that recollects, that remembers, and that does not forget the noble path. This is what is known as right mindfulness.

11.­153

“What is right concentration? It is to be perfectly even, the same as all phenomena. When one dwells in this state of concentration, one is engaging with perfection, and a bodhisatva who dwells in this state of concentration engages with perfection in order to liberate all sentient beings. This is what is known as right concentration. This imperishable path is the path that has been taken by the lords, the buddhas, of the past, the future, and the present, and when the bodhisatva has realized it, he communicates it, explains it, and elucidates it. This is what is known as right concentration.

11.­154

“These are what are known as the eight aspects of the path of the bodhisatva. This is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to path.

11.­155

“Furthermore, when it comes to skill in the path, the path of the bodhisatvas has two parts. What are these two parts? They are calm abiding meditation and insight meditation. This is what is known as the twofold path.

11.­156

“What is calm abiding meditation? It is mental peace, calm, and tranquility. It is to not be distracted, to tame the senses. It is to not be wild, to not be haughty, to not be fickle, and to not babble. It is to be gentle, to be careful, and to not be slack. It is to be pleasant.137 It is to enjoy solitude, to remove oneself from society, and to enjoy isolation. It is to isolate the body, to not let the mind be disturbed, and to turn one’s attention toward the wilderness. It is to have few desires [F.183.b] and to be content. It is to maintain a pure livelihood, to be of good character, and to conscientiously maintain one’s practice. It is to know the right time for things, to know the right moment for things, and to know what the right amount is. It is to be easily sated, to be easily satisfied. It is to be analytical and to not be excitable or depressed. It is to be able to endure insulting words. It is to be motivated for spiritual practice, to take joy in the practice of introspection, and to engage one’s mind in the different aspects of meditation. It is to cultivate love, to develop compassion, to dwell in joy, and to practice equanimity. It is to gradually attain the meditative states, from the first through to the eighth. This is what is known as calm abiding meditation.

11.­157

“What is insight meditation? It is the path of practice, which is related to wisdom. It is the fact that there is no movement in phenomena, no self, no life force, [MS.130.a] and no person. It is the knowledge that sees the skandhas as heaps of illusions, the knowledge that sees the phenomenal element in the elements, and the knowledge that sees the sense fields as an empty city. It is the knowledge that sees distinctions with respect to the eye, the knowledge that sees no contradiction with respect to dependent origination, and the knowledge that sees without holding the view of a being. It is the knowledge that sees the process of ripening from cause to effect, the knowledge that sees immediately what the effect will be, and the knowledge that sees the process by which one can access perfection.

11.­158

“Furthermore, insight meditation refers to seeing phenomena just as they are, seeing the actual nature of phenomena, seeing nothing other than phenomena just as they are, seeing that phenomena are empty, seeing that phenomena are free from attributes, and seeing that phenomena are free from aspiration.

11.­159

“Also, when speaking of ‘insight meditation’ there is no insight that arises due to a cause, no insight without a cause, no insight that is caused by arising, cessation, or remaining, [F.184.a] and no insight that is caused by an object. There is in fact no insight at all in insight meditation.

11.­160

“Moreover, when it comes to insight meditation, one sees due to seeing, but the seeing is not seen. When one sees this, one sees what is real. When one sees what is real, one has mastered insight meditation. While the bodhisatva who practices insight meditation sees in this way, he still does not go over to the side of the unconditioned or stop engaging with the conditions of the roots of virtue. This is what is known as the insight meditation of the bodhisatva.

11.­161

“In this way, the bodhisatva who is skilled in the paths of calm abiding and insight meditation practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­162

“Furthermore, in the context of skill in the path, the path of the bodhisatva has four aspects. What are the four aspects of the path of the bodhisatva? They are to cultivate the desire that evil, unwholesome tendencies that have not yet arisen will not arise, and to strive, to be vigorous, to commit oneself, and to apply oneself wholeheartedly to this endeavor; to cultivate the desire to be rid of evil unwholesome tendencies that have arisen, and to strive, to be vigorous, to commit oneself, and to apply oneself wholeheartedly to this endeavor; to cultivate the desire that wholesome tendencies that have not yet arisen will arise, and to strive, to be vigorous, to commit oneself, and to apply oneself wholeheartedly to this endeavor; and to cultivate the desire that wholesome tendencies that have arisen may last, that they may be developed, that they may not degenerate, and that they may not go to waste, and to strive, to be vigorous, to commit oneself, and to apply oneself wholeheartedly to this endeavor.

11.­163

“When one says that he ‘cultivates the desire that evil, unwholesome tendencies will not arise,’ this is an expression of his proper mental application. When one says that he will ‘strive and be vigorous,’ this is an expression of the fact that he will not abandon this proper mental application. When one says that he will ‘commit himself and apply himself wholeheartedly to this endeavor,’ this is an expression of the fact that he will investigate this in a non-superficial way. Why is this? When one applies oneself in a non-superficial way, unwholesome [F.184.b] tendencies will not be supported. What are these unwholesome tendencies? They are that which is detrimental to morality, that which is detrimental to concentration, and that which is detrimental to wisdom. What is it that is detrimental to morality? It is failing to maintain one’s morality, as well as when there are any external factors that cause one to fail in one’s morality. This is what is known as being detrimental to morality. What is it that is detrimental to concentration? It is when one’s character is not good, as well as when there are any external factors that are detrimental to the concentration one has amassed and that create distractions in the mind. This is what is known as being detrimental to concentration. What is it that is detrimental to wisdom? It is when one fails to maintain right view, as well as when there are any external factors [MS.130.b] that are detrimental to the wisdom one has amassed and that create obstructions that overwhelm one’s right view. This is what is known as being detrimental to wisdom. These things are what are known as evil unwholesome tendencies. With proper mental application, he cultivates the desire to eliminate these kinds of evil unwholesome tendencies and to strive, to be vigorous, to commit himself, and to apply himself wholeheartedly to this endeavor. Then these unwholesome tendencies will not amass in his mind‍—they will find no room; they will have no place there.

11.­164

“He understands the mental processes that are involved in these unwholesome tendencies. He understands that they have arisen on the basis of causes and objects,138 desire being caused by beauty, anger being caused by enmity, and confusion being caused by ignorance. Because he understands this, he applies his mind in an appropriate way, and he uses what is disagreeable to pacify desire, love to pacify anger, and dependent origination to pacify confusion. This way of pacifying the corruptions is known as elimination through labeling designations. Nothing is attained with this kind of elimination. When the sameness of all phenomena manifests itself directly, [F.185.a] that is what is known as proper elimination. This is the second kind of perfect elimination.

11.­165

“Then, when he says that he will ‘cultivate the desire that wholesome tendencies that have not yet arisen will arise,’ and that he will ‘strive, be vigorous, commit himself, and apply himself wholeheartedly to this endeavor,’ these are words that cannot be measured. Why is this? It is because the wholesome tendencies that are to be cultivated by the bodhisatva are immeasurable. This desire is the root of all roots of virtue. To command vigor is the root of all roots of virtue. Mental engagement and application are the roots of all roots of virtue. This is the third kind of perfect elimination.

11.­166

“Then, when he says that he will ‘cultivate the desire that wholesome tendencies that have arisen may last, that they may be developed, that they may not degenerate, and that they may not go to waste,’ and that he will ‘strive, be vigorous, commit himself, and apply himself wholeheartedly to this endeavor,’ this is an expression of the fact that he dedicates his roots of virtue to awakening. Why is this? It is because roots of virtue that are dedicated to awakening will not be lost until one finally reaches the seat of awakening. Why is this? It is because his motivation is not dependent on the three realms. Any roots of virtue that are related to the three realms will perish. Why is this? It is because his motivation is dependent on the three realms. In this way, roots of virtue that are not dependent on the three realms and that are dedicated to the state of omniscience will not perish for any reason. This is the fourth kind of perfect elimination.

“This is how the bodhisatva who is skilled in the four elements of the path practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­167

“Furthermore, in the context of skill in the path, the path of the bodhisatva has five faculties. What are these five faculties? They are the faculty of faith, the faculty of vigor, the faculty of mindfulness, the faculty of concentration, and the faculty of wisdom.

11.­168

“What is the faculty of faith? It is the faith that trusts in four Dharma teachings. What are these four Dharma teachings? [F.185.b] They are to trust completely in the right view of worldly matters and the workings of cyclic existence; to rely on the ripening of the fruits of actions and not engage in any evil actions, even to save one’s life; to have faith in the way of the bodhisatva and not long for any other approach when one is engaging with the practice; to have faith in the explicit meaning of the ultimate truth, the profundity of dependent origination, the fact that all phenomena are characterized by emptiness and freedom from attributes but still not harbor any tendency to cling to views; and to have faith in all the qualities of the Buddha, his powers and confidences, and to not question them or doubt them when one hears about them but rather work to develop these qualities. This is what is known as [MS.131.a] the faculty of faith.

11.­169

“What is the faculty of vigor? When one has faith in these qualities one works vigorously to attain them. This is what is known as the faculty of vigor.

11.­170

“Because of one’s faculty of mindfulness, one does not forget about these qualities when one is working vigorously to attain them. This is what is known as the faculty of mindfulness.

11.­171

“One does not forget about these qualities because of one’s faculty of mindfulness, and one remains focused on them one-pointedly by means of one’s faculty of concentration. This is what is known as the faculty of concentration.

11.­172

“One remains focused on these qualities one-pointedly by means of one’s faculty of concentration. One analyzes them by means of one’s faculty of wisdom and comes to understand them. This is what is known as the faculty of wisdom.

11.­173

“In this way, these five faculties are intimately connected. They bring about the mastery of all the perfect buddha qualities and lead to the attainment of the stage of receiving a prediction of awakening. Those who possess the five external superior abilities do not make predictions about a being who has been conceived in the womb until the fetus has developed the faculties of the female or male gender. In the same way, the lords, the buddhas, do not make predictions about a bodhisatva until he has developed these five faculties.

11.­174

“This is what is known as the fivefold path, and this is how the bodhisatva who is skilled in the fivefold path practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­175

“Śāriputra, there is another fivefold path that the bodhisatvas are skilled in. What are the five faculties of this path? [F.186.a] They are the power of faith, the power of vigor, the power of mindfulness, the power of concentration, and the power of wisdom.

11.­176

“What is the power of faith? It is the kind of motivation that comes from trust, that is one-pointed, and that cannot be crushed. If the evil Māra were to approach the bodhisatva in the guise of a buddha discourage and dissuade him in any number of ways from cultivating an interest in knowledge of the Dharma, saying, ‘This teaching is not the teaching of the Buddha,’ and even if he could make it appear that the four major elements had been transformed, he would still not be able to separate him from the power of his faith, because of his confidence in the power of faith. This is what is known as the bodhisatva’s power of faith.

11.­177

“What is the power of vigor? It is such that when he applies himself with vigor, engaging with any kind of wholesome qualities and achieving an effective powerful stability in them, the world with its gods cannot stop this effective power. It cannot influence him until he comes out of this state. This is what is known as the power of vigor.

11.­178

“What is the bodhisatva’s power of mindfulness? Whatever he takes as the object of the application of his mindfulness, there is no kind of vice whatsoever that can throw him off or make him lose his focus. With this kind of power of mindfulness, he can crush all disruptions. His mindfulness is indestructible. This is what is known as the bodhisatva’s power of mindfulness.

11.­179

“What is the bodhisatva’s power of concentration? It is to dwell secluded from any kind of company. He masters all forms of verbal communication but does not let the thicket of words become an obscuration to the first meditative state. He continues to actively recognize what is wholesome, but this does not obscure the second meditative state. He remains happy and joyful, but this does not obscure the third meditative state. [F.186.b] He does not remain indifferent to bringing sentient beings to maturity or preserving the true teachings, but this does not obscure the fourth meditative state. As he dwells in these four meditative states, he cannot possibly be hampered by factors that stand in opposition to meditation.139 He does not abandon his state of concentration, yet he does not use his power of concentration to gain rebirth. This is the bodhisatva’s power of concentration.

11.­180

“What is the bodhisatva’s [MS.131.b] power of wisdom? It is a knowledge that cannot be destroyed by any worldly or transcendental factors. Immediately after his birth, even though he has no teacher, the bodhisatva will display all kinds of worldly skills and abilities, however outstanding, challenging, or difficult they may be. The transcendental, too, which brings liberation from the world, arises within the bodhisatva by means of the power of wisdom and knowledge, and it cannot be crushed by the world with its gods, humans, and asuras. This is what is known as the bodhisatva’s power of wisdom.

11.­181

“This is the other path that includes five faculties, and this is how the bodhisatva who is skilled in the fivefold path practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­182

“Furthermore, if this is condensed there is a bodhisatva path that has only one element. It is the path that is traversed alone. This means that the bodhisatva is alone, with no other companions, as he sets out for unsurpassed perfect awakening. He has a vigorous, strong, powerful motivation. He is not guided by anyone else. He is not reliant on others. He works alone. His own qualities are fully developed. Such is the strength of the armor they don: ‘We will help sentient beings to attain what they cannot attain. We will help all the noble ones and all those bodhisatvas who have newly entered into the vehicle to attain what they cannot attain. Generosity is not my companion. [F.187.a] I am the companion of generosity. Morality, patient acceptance, vigor, meditation, and wisdom are not my companions. I am their companion. I am not supported by the perfections. It is the perfections that are supported by me. All the roots of virtue, as listed above, may be inserted here to illustrate this point. I am not supported by the roots of virtue. All the roots of virtue are supported by me. Proceeding with no companions in this way, I will be alone, with no one by my side, as I sit upon the vajra seat of awakening, conquer the powerful māras, and by means of the wisdom that arises in that one moment attain unsurpassed perfect awakening.’ This is the conviction that motivates them. This is what is known as the path of the bodhisatva that is traversed alone, and this is how the bodhisatva who is skilled in the path that is traversed alone practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­183

“Now, what is the bodhisatvas’ skill in dependent origination? The bodhisatva retreats to a secluded place and absorbs himself in meditation, reflecting in the following way: ‘Where does the origin of this great mass of suffering come from?’ He answers, ‘The origin of ignorance comes from the origin of superficiality. The origin of mental conditioning comes from the origin of ignorance. The origin of consciousness comes from the origin of mental conditioning. The origin of name and form comes from the origin of consciousness. The origin of the six sense fields comes from the origin of name and form. The origin of contact comes from the origin of the six sense fields. The origin of feeling comes from the origin of contact. The origin of desire comes from the origin of feeling. The origin of grasping comes from the origin of desire. The origin of becoming comes from the origin of desire. The origin of birth comes from the origin of becoming. The origin of aging, death, pain, despair, suffering, depression, and struggle comes from the origin of birth.’ [F.187.b] He continues, ‘This is how these phenomena come about. They are powerless, ineffective, and ownerless. They are causally related to what is wholesome, to what is unwholesome, to what is immovable, and to nirvāṇa. They are all created by conditions. It is the causes of a sentient being’s actions, their causal faculties, and their causal behavior [MS.132.a] that determines the causal result.’ These may be complete or not complete, and he understands that everything is related to how the sum of causes turns out. This is what is known as skill in dependent origination.

11.­184

“Then he thinks, ‘How can this be stopped? Ignorance can be stopped by stopping superficial mental application. Mental conditioning can be stopped by stopping ignorance, and so forth. In this way the whole great mass of suffering is stopped.’ Seeing things in this way is what is known as skill in dependent origination.

11.­185

“He continues, thinking, ‘All phenomena are dependent on causes, dependent on conditions, and dependent on completeness. As they are dependent on causes, on conditions, and on completeness, there is no room for a self, no room for a life force or a person. These things cannot be calculated.’ To examine things in this way is what is known as skill in dependent origination.

11.­186

“In this way, the bodhisatva sees clearly how the conditions that define awakening, and all the qualities of the Buddha, come about, and how these conditions are destroyed and halted. Because of his concern for all sentient beings, he does not allow them to be destroyed or halted. This is what is known as the bodhisatva’s skill in dependent origination, and this is how the bodhisatva who is skilled in dependent origination practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­187

“Now, what is the bodhisatva’s skilled approach to all phenomena? All phenomena implies both the conditioned and the unconditioned, and the bodhisatva is skilled with respect to both the conditioned and the unconditioned.

11.­188

“To be skilled with respect to the conditioned [F.188.a] is to be capable with regard to conditioned physical things, conditioned verbal things, and conditioned mental things.140 To transform conditioned physical, verbal, and mental virtues into unconditioned awakening by realizing the unconditioned is skill in the unconditioned.

11.­189

“Moreover, to be skilled with respect to the conditioned is to master the five perfections‍—the perfections of generosity, morality, patient acceptance, vigor, and meditation‍—and also to not disparage the five perfections from the perspective of the perfection of wisdom, even though one has understood the unconditioned.141 To be skillful in amassing all the perfections while devoted to undefiled awakening, and to dedicate it to omniscience, is skill in the unconditioned.

11.­190

“Moreover, to be skilled with respect to the conditioned is to radiate unimpeded rays of light to all sentient beings, gathering sentient beings together by using the four methods for bringing people together. Moreover, it is to maintain a skillful approach to the methods for bringing people together by not holding on to things, understanding that there is no being and no self. To be devoted to unconditioned awakening, and to dedicate oneself to it for the sake of omniscience, this is skill in the unconditioned.

11.­191

“Moreover, to be skilled with respect to the conditioned is to not cut off the link one has to the continuum of cyclic existence, while cutting off the vices that bind one to cyclic existence. It is to maintain one’s connection with the objective of awakening, but not to do so in a limited manner. This is what is known as skill in the conditioned. To be skilled in discerning the kind of knowledge that is familiar with emptiness, freedom from attributes, and freedom from aspirations, to not be dependent on others for awakening, and to not reify the unconditioned is what is known as skill in the unconditioned.

11.­192

“Moreover, to engage with the three realms of existence while not being affected by the vices that are connected with the three realms is what is known as his skill in the conditioned. [F.188.b] To have an understanding of the knowledge of how to escape from the three realms while not losing oneself in the state of deliverance is what is known as skill in the unconditioned.

11.­193

“The expression being skilled in all phenomena is a synonym for omniscience. [MS.132.b] Omniscience, the perfect realization of all knowledge, does not shine forth in the absence of wisdom and skill.142 This is why it is called skill in all phenomena, and this is how the bodhisatva who is skilled in all phenomena practices the perfection of wisdom.

11.­194

“In this way, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva, the great being, who has mastered The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva and who practices the perfection of wisdom is skilled in employing the analytical tools of wisdom and skilled in these ten kinds of skill in his practice of the perfection of wisdom.

11.­195

“What is ‘wisdom’ here, and what is the purpose of the perfections? Wisdom refers to understanding what is wholesome and what is unwholesome. Wisdom is direct perception of what is conducive to insight. Wisdom is a valid means of knowledge, as it directly perceives noble qualities. Wisdom sees all viewpoints, all patterns, all hindrances, and all obstructions for exactly what they are.143 Wisdom is freedom from the longing involved in all desires, goals, and aspirations. Wisdom is a cause of pleasure, as it removes all anguish. Wisdom is a cause of joy as it does not sever the object of delight in the Dharma.144 Wisdom is a support, as it provides direct access to all knowledge. Wisdom is the foundation of all the elements that are conducive to awakening. Wisdom is characterized by attainment, as it leads to the realization of the goals of the different vehicles. Wisdom is characterized by thorough insight into naturally manifesting knowledge. [F.189.a] Wisdom is liberating, as it rescues one from all rivers. Wisdom is a guide that brings one safely to what is perfect. Wisdom takes hold of all wholesome qualities. Wisdom is the purification of all ingrained vices. Wisdom is the best of all the highest attainments of the Dharma. Wisdom is the supreme approach to the realization of self-arisen knowledge. Wisdom is beyond any process, as it is not mixed up with the three realms. Wisdom is what is taken up by all the noble ones. Wisdom cuts off longing, as it removes all attributes. Wisdom is the enemy of inattentiveness, as it is free from all ignorance, darkness, and blindness. Wisdom is how all those who have attained the various stages of spiritual practice apply themselves. Wisdom is a guide for all those who travel the path to omniscient knowledge. Wisdom illuminates by clearing away the veil of obscuration, the looming flood of ignorance. Wisdom bestows sight on all according to the kind of sight they wish for. Wisdom is not situated anywhere,145 as it transcends the realm of eyesight and form. Wisdom is the ultimate objective, as it derives from truth. Wisdom is unshakable, as it derives from thorough training. Wisdom appears through the door of knowledge. Wisdom is imperishable, as it penetrates everywhere. Wisdom cannot be obstructed, as it is the vision that engages with dependent origination. Wisdom is the way to liberation, as it severs all bonds of grasping. Wisdom is not mixed up with any of the vices. Wisdom is unassociated, and it cannot remain where there are any obstructions.

11.­196

“Thus, Śāriputra, the acts of wisdom and the acts of knowledge of bodhisatvas are as numerous and varied as the many ways in which sentient beings think and act. Whatever the inclinations of sentient beings may be, the bodhisatva can match them with his wisdom, his capacity for investigation, and his knowledge. No matter how sentient beings approach the vices, the bodhisatva will have a way to relate to them by means of wisdom. [F.189.b] Whatever insight all the śrāvakas, pratyekabuddhas, and fully accomplished buddhas may have attained, the bodhisatva will study these statements on wisdom in every situation. This is what is known as the wisdom of the bodhisatva.

11.­197

“Now, what is the purpose of the perfections? Whatever wisdom is, that is the purpose of the perfections. Understanding what is wholesome is what is meant by ‘the purpose of the perfections.’ Here, all the elements that are relevant when discussing the perfections may be added. [MS.133.a] In addition, fully completing the exemplary path of the bodhisatva is the purpose of the perfections. Also, fully perfecting the knowledge of omniscience is the purpose of the perfections. Not being attached to the conditioned or the unconditioned is the purpose of the perfections. Gaining an understanding of the shortcomings of cyclic existence is the purpose of the perfections. Revealing the inexhaustible treasury of the teachings is the purpose of the perfections. Fully perfecting unobstructed liberation is the purpose of the perfections. Recognizing the sameness of generosity, morality, patient acceptance, vigor, meditation, and wisdom is the purpose of the perfections. Skill in discerning things is the purpose of the perfections. Operating within all the realms of sentient beings is the purpose of the perfections. Fully perfecting one’s patient acceptance of the fact that phenomena do not arise is the purpose of the perfections. Fully perfecting the stage of irreversibility is the purpose of the perfections. Fully accomplishing buddha fields is the purpose of the perfections. Bringing sentient beings to maturity is the purpose of the perfections. The actual attainment of the seat of awakening is the purpose of the perfections. Completely overcoming all māras is the purpose of the perfections. Fully developing the complete qualities of a buddha is the purpose of the perfections. Moreover, furthering the cycle of teachings contained within The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva is the purpose of the perfections. [F.190.a]

11.­198

“Śāriputra, as one trains in the cycle of teachings contained within The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, one will accomplish all the perfections. Therefore, Śāriputra, sons and daughters of good family who follow the Mahāyāna should adopt the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva. They should preserve it, recite it, elucidate it for others, and teach it in great detail. Why should they do this? They should do this, Śāriputra, because when they have studied it conscientiously, preserved it, recited it, mastered it, elucidated it to others, and taught it in great detail, they will gain ten benefits.

11.­199

“What are these ten benefits? One will gain mastery in all arts and crafts after one has died and journeyed on to future lives. One will be highborn. One will be renowned as a great lord. One’s words will be honored. One will possess great riches. One will be loved by gods and men. One will become a king of the entire world. One will reach the state of Brahmā. One will never be separated from the mind of awakening. These are the ten benefits one will gain.

11.­200

“There is a further set of ten benefits one will gain. What are these ten benefits? One will not end up associating with the teachings of the Jains. One will not hold the view of a self or the view of a being, of a life force, of a person, of annihilation, or of permanence. One will not be affected by any object. Rejoicing in renunciation, one will successfully cultivate the mind of awakening. One will quickly understand the statements that one hears. These are the ten benefits one will gain.

11.­201

“There is a further set of ten benefits one will gain. What are these ten benefits? One will possess mindfulness. One will possess intelligence. One will possess learning. One will possess authority. One will possess wisdom. [F.190.b] One will gain freedoms and opportunities. One will remember one’s former lives. One will naturally possess few vices, and one’s desire will not be powerful‍—one will not have to suffer the agony of fiercely burning desire. One’s anger will naturally diminish, and one’s anger will not be powerful‍—one will not have to suffer the agony that comes with fits of rage. One’s confusion will diminish, and one’s confusion will not be powerful‍—one will not have to suffer the agony that comes with excessive confusion. These are the ten benefits one will gain.

11.­202

“There is a further set of ten benefits one will gain. What are these ten benefits? One’s wisdom will be incredible. One’s wisdom will be agile. One’s wisdom will be sharp. One’s wisdom will be swift. One’s wisdom will be vast. One’s wisdom will be profound. [MS.133.b] One’s wisdom will be penetrating. One’s wisdom will be unimpeded. One will meet the Tathāgata face-to-face, and when one has seen him, one will praise him by singing verses. One will ask the Tathāgata a question that is not superficial, and one will receive an answer. These are the ten benefits one will gain.

11.­203

“There is a further set of ten benefits one will gain. What are these ten benefits? All one’s spiritual friends will be pleased. All Māra’s fetters will be loosened. All māras will be rebuked. All vices will be dismissed. One will not be swayed by any conditioned phenomena. One will turn one’s back on all paths that lead to unfavorable conditions. One will turn toward the paths that lead to nirvāṇa. One will give any gift that will facilitate liberation from cyclic existence. One will abide by the precepts of all the bodhisatvas. One will follow the instructions of all the lords, the buddhas. [F.191.a] These are the ten benefits one will gain.

11.­204

“Śāriputra, by conscientiously studying the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, by preserving it, reciting it, elucidating it to others, and teaching it in great detail, one will gain all these benefits.”

11.­205

Then, in order to clarify this point further, the Lord went on to speak these verses:

11.­206
“The wisdom of those who take
This king of sūtras to heart will be limitless.
They will be experts in meaning and objects of meaning,
And they will also master the intricacies of terminology.
11.­207
“Someone who takes this king of sūtras to heart
Will give rise to the supreme ultimate joy
And so will be a mendicant, teach the Dharma,
And always give the gift of Dharma.
11.­208
“Beings will learn about all these qualities and say eagerly,
‘Amazing! These qualities that have been revealed are supreme.
When will I be able to display such qualities
And be known as such a bearer of the sūtras?’
11.­209
“Those who possess this kind of excellent wisdom
Will not become discouraged in the face of any Dharma teaching.
Elevated by mindfulness and knowledge,
They propound the unsurpassed words of knowledge.
11.­210
“Someone who takes this king of sūtras to heart
Will search for the well-spoken words of the Dharma,
The instructions of the Victorious One that are always praised by the noble ones.
When he has heard them, he holds them in high esteem.
11.­211
“They learn them and ascertain their meaning;
The wise do not insist on the letter.
Instead, they search for the meaning, and their understanding prospers.
Indeed, the knowledge of the Victorious One is forever unlimited.
11.­212
“Unlimited knowledge of unlimited meaning,
Unlimited intelligence, and expertise in the ultimate truth‍—
His qualities extend throughout the ten directions.
His are the benefits that come from learning.
11.­213
“He has little desire, and even less anger.
His confusion is utterly negligible.
His mind has become utterly pure‍—
His are the benefits that come from learning.
11.­214
“He does not become excited when he gains wealth
But examines whether it has any essence.
Understanding that there is no lasting essence in wealth,
He loses interest in it and becomes a renunciant. [F.191.b]
11.­215
“As a renunciant he retreats to the wilderness,
And there he never loses heart.
He is never content with his studies of the teachings,
And he is not miserly when it comes to giving the gift of the Dharma.
11.­216
“He presents his questions
In the presence of the protector of the world.
In this way, his knowledge prospers
And his goodness does not diminish.
11.­217

“This, Śāriputra, is what the bodhisatvas’ perfection of wisdom is like, the perfection of wisdom by means of which bodhisatvas, great beings, practice the way of the bodhisatva. This is what is known as engagement with the perfection of wisdom.146 [MS.134.a]

11.­218

“Now, how does one employ the methods for bringing people together? There are four methods for bringing people together, and through these four methods, bodhisatvas are able to gather sentient beings around them for a long time. What are these four methods? They are generosity, pleasant speech, conscientiousness, and egalitarianism.

11.­219

“What is generosity? It is to give physical objects, to give fearlessness, and to give the Dharma. This is what is known as generosity. What is pleasant speech? It is to address anyone who comes to one with a request, and those who listen to the Dharma, with kindness. What is conscientiousness? It is to fulfill one’s own aims and those of others. What is egalitarianism? It is to help sentient beings take hold of the elements of the Dharma belonging to the vehicle they consider to have the best qualities.

11.­220

“Furthermore, generosity is to maintain a pure attitude toward anyone who comes to one with a request. This is what is known as generosity. Pleasant speech is to treat such people with respect. Conscientiousness is to grant whatever they ask for. Egalitarianism is to share their goals.

11.­221

“Furthermore, generosity is to give with an intention. Pleasant speech is to cut off effort. Conscientiousness is to not regret one’s noble intentions. Egalitarianism is to transform them into the Mahāyāna.

11.­222

“Furthermore, generosity is to practice renunciation with an attitude of love. Pleasant speech is to abandon an attitude of joy and delight. Conscientiousness is persevering with an attitude that is protected by the armor of great compassion, for the sake of sentient beings. [F.192.a] Egalitarianism is to remain equanimous, without ups and downs, with one’s mind dedicated to omniscient knowledge.

11.­223

“Furthermore, what is known as generosity is to give up riches in one’s search for the Dharma. Pleasant speech is to create a connection between those to whom one is generous and the Dharma. Conscientiousness is bringing benefit to oneself and to others. Egalitarianism is motivating oneself to attain the state of omniscience for the sake of all sentient beings.

11.­224

“Furthermore, generosity is giving up any sense of ownership of internal and external phenomena. Pleasant speech is not being a tight-fisted teacher when it comes to one’s knowledge of the qualities all phenomena. Conscientiousness is letting go of one’s own goals and facilitating the goals of others. Egalitarianism is not feeling bad about giving one’s own possessions to others.147

11.­225

“What is the gift of Dharma? It is to teach the Dharma according to tradition. Pleasant speech is to elucidate the Dharma without any expectation of reward. Conscientiousness is to not tire of reciting, presenting, and explaining the Dharma. Egalitarianism is to not be separated from the mind of omniscience as one engages in the development of the Dharma.

11.­226

“Furthermore, generosity is to be untiring in teaching whoever comes to listen to the teachings. Pleasant speech is to elucidate the true Dharma even when one has just arrived from far away. Conscientiousness is [MS.134.b] to part with clothing, to part with sustenance, bedding, seats, medicine for the sick, and utensils, to part with anything that one may have for the sake of Dharma and give it all to those who desire the Dharma. Egalitarianism is to teach the Dharma with sustained excellent intentions.

11.­227

“Furthermore, the gift of Dharma is to consider the gift of Dharma to be the best of all gifts when one gives it. Pleasant speech is to teach in order to bring about beneficial states of being. [F.192.b] Conscientiousness is to rely on the meaning and not on the words. Egalitarianism is to teach the Dharma in order to perfect the qualities of a buddha.

11.­228

“Furthermore, the gift of Dharma is the perfection of generosity. Pleasant speech is the perfection of morality and the perfection of patient acceptance. Conscientiousness is the perfection of vigor. Egalitarianism is the perfection of meditation and the perfection of wisdom.

11.­229

“Furthermore, generosity is the initial arising of the mind of awakening in bodhisatvas. Pleasant speech is the bodhisatvas’ engagement with practice. Conscientiousness is the bodhisatvas’ irreversibility. Egalitarianism is when the bodhisatvas are bound to only one more birth.

11.­230

“Furthermore, the gift of Dharma is the root that forms the foundation of awakening. Pleasant speech is the developing sprout of awakening. Conscientiousness is the blossoming flower of awakening. Egalitarianism is the appearance of the fruit of awakening.

11.­231

“These are the bodhisatvas’ four methods for bringing people together. By employing these four methods, the bodhisatvas, the great beings, attract sentient beings to the practice of awakening for long periods of time. This is what is meant by employing the methods for bringing people together.

11.­232

“These methods for bringing people together, then, which cannot be calculated, which have no measure, and which are the perfections, are what are known as the path of awakening.

11.­233

“So it was, Śāriputra, that the Lord, the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha Mahāskandha, revealed the path of awakening to Vīryacarita, and that he explained the nature of the lords, the buddhas, of the past, the future, and the present.

11.­234

“Śāriputra, the prince Vīryacarita learned the path of awakening from the Lord, the Tathāgata Mahāskandha. He learned the nature that defines the lords, the buddhas, of the past, the future, and the present, and he was immensely happy and delighted. [F.193.a] Completely happy and delighted, he praised, venerated, honored, and worshiped the Lord, the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha Mahāskandha, together with his assembly of śrāvakas, for nine hundred sixty million years, offering clothing, sustenance, bedding, seats, medicine for the sick, and utensils, and expressed his aspiration to attain awakening, but the Lord, the Tathāgata Mahāskandha did not make any predictions of unsurpassed perfect awakening.

11.­235

“Śāriputra, no one should entertain any doubt, any uncertainty, about whether this prince named Vīryacarita who appeared at this time, on this occasion, was anyone else. [MS.135.a] Why is this? It is because it was I who was that prince named Vīryacarita who appeared at that time, on that occasion. It was I who praised, venerated, honored, and worshiped the Lord, the Tathāgata Mahāskandha, and his assembly of śrāvakas for nine hundred sixty million years and expressed my aspiration to attain awakening. It was me whose awakening the Lord did not predict, saying, ‘In the future, you will become a tathāgata, an arhat, a fully accomplished buddha.’

11.­236

“So it was, Śāriputra, that innumerable eons after the Lord Mahāskandha, a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished buddha by the name of Ratnāṅga appeared in the world, and so forth. He was awakened, a lord. The Tathāgata Ratnāṅga, Śāriputra, had a great following of eight trillion śrāvakas, all of whom were arhats who had eliminated the defilements, who were free from vices, who were powerful, and so forth, and who had reached the very highest level of complete mastery of the mind. [F.193.b]

11.­237

“At that time, Śāriputra, there was a king by the name of Sudarśana, a king of the four quarters, a just king who ruled according to the Dharma and was energetic and diligent on behalf of his populace and in possession of the seven precious implements. The seven implements he possessed were the precious wheel, and so forth, up to and including the precious minister. He conquered, and so forth, and he governed.

11.­238

“Śāriputra, the king Sudarśana’s royal capital was called Jāmbūnada. From east to west it stretched for twelve yojanas. From south to north it was seven yojanas across. It was wealthy, thriving, prosperous, well supplied, pleasant, and bustling with throngs of people.

11.­239

“At that time, there was a merchant by the name of Suprajña. He was wealthy, he had great riches, and so forth, and he had storerooms filled with riches and treasure. He had developed roots of virtue in the presence of past buddhas. He had served the buddhas of the past.

11.­240

“It so happened, Śāriputra, that the Lord, the Tathāgata Ratnāṅga, saw the intentions of the merchant Suprajña, and it occurred to him, ‘This merchant, Suprajña, is truly a suitable recipient for the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva.’ Having concluded that he was a suitable recipient, he approached the merchant Suprajña, seated himself magically on a throne floating in midair, and presented the path to awakening, describing the nature of the lords, the buddhas, of the past, the future, and the present.

11.­241

“Then, Śāriputra, as the merchant Suprajña learned about the path of the bodhisatvas, the great beings, as he learned about the nature of the lords, the buddhas, of the past, the future, and the present, he became happy, elated, and delighted. [F.194.a] Being happy, elated, and delighted, he praised, venerated, honored, and worshiped the Lord, the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha Ratnāṅga, and his assembly of śrāvakas for a thousand years with clothing, sustenance, [MS.135.b] bedding, seats, medicine for the sick, and utensils, and he expressed his aspiration to attain unsurpassed perfect awakening. Still, the Lord, the Tathāgata Ratnāṅga did not make any predictions of unsurpassed perfect awakening.

11.­242

“Śāriputra, no one should entertain any doubt, any uncertainty, about whether this merchant named Suprajña, who appeared at this time, on this occasion, was anyone else. I was that merchant named Suprajña, who appeared at that time, on that occasion. It was I who praised, venerated, honored, and worshiped the Lord, the Tathāgata Ratnāṅga, and his assembly of śrāvakas for a thousand years and expressed my aspiration to attain awakening. It was me who the Lord, the Tathāgata Ratnāṅga, did not predict to unsurpassed perfect awakening, saying, ‘In the future, you will become a tathāgata, an arhat, a fully accomplished buddha.’

11.­243

“Then, Śāriputra, innumerable eons after Ratnāṅga, a tathāgata by the name of Dīpaṅkara appeared in the world. At this time there was a king by the name of Jitaśatru, and the capital city of King Jitaśatru, Śāriputra, was called Padmāvatī. It was wealthy, thriving, prosperous, well supplied, pleasant, and bustling with throngs of people.

11.­244

“The king Jitaśatru, Śāriputra, had a brahmin named Dīpapati148 who was the son of a great noble household. He was wealthy and he had great riches, many possessions, and so forth and storerooms filled with riches and treasure. [F.194.b] The king Jitaśatru liked him, loved him, considered him a friend and comfort, and liked to have him close by. So it was, Śāriputra, that the king Jitaśatru gave the great brahmin lord Dīpapati half his kingdom. As a king, Dīpapati ruled half the kingdom according to the Dharma, and not in a way that was contrary to the Dharma.

11.­245

“The time came, Śāriputra, when a son was born to king Dīpapati. He was beautiful, handsome, pleasant, and possessed the most excellent and splendid features. He had a body adorned with the thirty-two characteristics of a great being. His whole body emitted light, as if it were the disk of the sun. He was given the name Dīpaṅkara.

11.­246

“Śāriputra, the king Dīpapati had brahmin astrologers, knowers of signs, sent for to look at the prince Dīpaṅkara, and they predicted that he would attain awakening. The king Dīpapati then obtained female nurses for the prince Dīpaṅkara.

11.­247

“After a very short time, Śāriputra, the prince Dīpaṅkara attained the superior abilities. Then, Śāriputra, the divine sons of the pure abodes emanated from the Heaven of Nothing Higher and approached the bodhisatva Dīpaṅkara. They circumambulated the bodhisatva Dīpaṅkara and then spoke these verses to the bodhisatva, the great being, Dīpaṅkara:

11.­248
“ ‘No good qualities will come
From living with a royal harem.
Someone who puts his trust in the banner of the seers
Will realize unsurpassed awakening.
11.­249
“ ‘When one is young, one can move swiftly,
As fast as the powerful wind,
But with age one’s body withers
And becomes unattractive to the world.
11.­250
“ ‘Friends, when age has taken its toll,
It will be difficult to become a renunciate. [MS.136.a]
This is the best time of your youth.
Now is your chance.
11.­251
“ ‘It is excellent, excellent, to have great wisdom. [F.195.a]
It is excellent, excellent, to have a great intellect.
If you go forth quickly, that will be excellent.
Be firm in your practice and attain awakening!’ [B20]
11.­252

“In this way, Śāriputra, the bodhisatva Dīpaṅkara was spurred on by the gods of the pure abodes, and following his conviction he left the household life behind and became a renunciant. He attained unsurpassed perfect awakening that very same night. At that very moment, verses of praise, words of greatness and goodness, spread forth, saying that Dīpaṅkara was a lord, a tathāgata, an arhat, a fully accomplished buddha, and so forth, that he was awakened, a lord. The king Jitaśatru heard about this, that the son of the king Dīpapati had become an unsurpassed, fully accomplished buddha without training, and that verses of praise about him, words of greatness and goodness proclaiming that he was awakened, a lord, and so forth, were spreading. The king Jitaśatru, Śāriputra, then dispatched a messenger to the king Dīpapati, saying, ‘It has come to my attention that your son has become a renunciant, and that he has realized perfect awakening. I wish to meet your son Dīpaṅkara. I hope that the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara will bestow the grace of a visit upon me. If it should happen that you do not come, I will have to come to you, together with my fourfold army.’

11.­253

“Śāriputra, the king Dīpapati now gathered his council of astrologers, ministers, councilors, and guards to inform them of the situation, and he told them, ‘The divine Lord should be approached and asked about this, about whether the great compassionate Lord will in fact, out of his love, go to see the king Jitaśatru. The king Jitaśatru should under no circumstance have to come here.’

11.­254

“Then, Śāriputra, [F.195.b] the king Dīpapati, together with his ministers, went to the place where the Lord Dīpaṅkara was staying. When he arrived there, he honored the Lord by placing his head at his feet, and he then delivered the news. When he had spoken, the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara said this to the king Dīpapati, ‘Great king, out of love, I will present myself to the king Jitaśatru.’

11.­255

“The lord, the tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, Śāriputra, had been living comfortably in the supremely divine royal palace, but he now set out to make this journey across the land together with eight hundred million arhats and eight million four hundred thousand bodhisatvas. The king Dīpapati and his fourfold army went with him as an escort to the border of the kingdom, and there he honored him with clothing, sustenance, bedding, seats, medicine for the sick, and utensils. [MS.136.b] He placed his head at the feet of the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, circumambulated him three times, shed a few tears, and left.

11.­256

“The king Jitaśatru learned that the Lord, the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha Dīpaṅkara, was now on his way to the royal capital Padmāvatī together with a following of eight hundred million śrāvakas. The king Jitaśatru then had the royal capital Padmāvatī decorated. To the four corners of the city, at the places where three or four roads formed an intersection, he had gravel and stones cleared away, the surfaces swept and cleaned, and perfumed water sprinkled over them. He had flowers, piled knee-high, that one could walk upon, and he set up incense burners that spread their fragrance. He had canopies made of different kinds of precious fabrics erected, [F.196.a] and various instruments were played. As the king Jitaśatru had decorated the royal capital Padmāvatī, he then gave the order that any flowers, scents, or ointments available within the royal capital should not be used up and should not be sold, but should all be offered in honor of the Lord Dīpaṅkara. He further ordered that anyone who used up or traded these things would be severely punished.

11.­257

“Then King Jitaśatru, together with his fourfold army, left his royal residence in Padmāvatī to meet the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, and welcome him with flowers, incense, garlands, ointments, aromatic powders, cloth, parasols, royal banners, flags, the sounds of various instruments, his royal powers, and his royal magical abilities. The brahmins and householders of Padmāvatī also came out to see the arrival of the Lord. They prostrated themselves to the feet of the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, and honored the Lord with flowers, garlands, incense, ointments, aromatic powders, cloth, parasols, royal banners, and flags. The ministers, attendants, brahmins, and householders honored the Lord by placing their heads at his feet, and when they had presented their offerings to him, they joined the procession toward the city. King Jitaśatru was pleased, happy, serene, and overjoyed as he escorted the Lord.

11.­258

“At that time, there was a brahmin by the name of Ratna who was living on the slopes of the mountain Himavat together with five hundred apprentice brahmins. He was a preceptor, a master of mantras, and adept in the Vedic scriptures, and he had clear insight. He had mastery of the five legendary accounts and could explain them word by word as they were analyzed into syllables and words. He was an unblemished authority on the materialist philosophy, on the scriptures regarding sacrifice, and on the characteristic marks of a great being, [F.196.b] and he had a complete understanding of the threefold knowledge as presented by the scholars of his own tradition.

11.­259

“Together with the brahmin Ratna, Śāriputra, there lived a younger brahmin named Megha. He was a preceptor, a master of mantras, and adept in the Vedic scriptures, and he had clear insight. [MS.137.a] He had mastery of the five legendary accounts and could explain them word by word as they were analyzed into syllables and words. He was an authority on materialist philosophy, on the scriptures regarding sacrifice, and on the characteristic marks of a great being, and he had a complete understanding of the threefold knowledge as presented by the scholars of his own tradition.

11.­260

“Śāriputra, when the young brahmin Megha had mastered the Vedas, he addressed his preceptor Ratna with these words: ‘O preceptor, I have mastered the Vedas, and I will now return to my own country. What should I do?’

“He answered, ‘My son Megha, you should pay the teacher’s fee of five hundred karṣāpaṇa.’

11.­261

“Then the young brahmin Megha saluted the feet of his preceptor, circumambulated him three times, and left. He traveled to many cities, towns, villages, countries, kingdoms, and royal courts searching for the money for his teacher’s fee. When he had spent some time collecting money for his teacher’s fee in this way, he arrived at the royal capital Padmāvatī. The young brahmin Megha saw how the royal capital Padmāvatī had been decorated, and he asked a passerby, ‘My good man, is there a festival here in the capital Padmāvatī?’

11.­262

“The man answered, ‘Have you not heard, young man? Today the Lord, the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha Dīpaṅkara, is coming to the capital Padmāvatī, together with eight hundred million śrāvakas and eight million four hundred thousand bodhisatvas. This is why the capital Padmāvatī has been decorated. The people who live here will make offerings and thus gain merit.’

11.­263

“Śāriputra, when the young brahmin Megha [F.197.a] heard the man mention the Buddha, great joy, serenity, and delight arose in him, and he thought, ‘It is difficult to encounter the lords, the buddhas. It is truly difficult, extremely difficult. It is an occurrence as rare as the appearance of the udumbara flower. It is just like in the example of the single yoke.149 I should spend these five hundred karṣāpaṇa on flowers to scatter in honor of the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, and then go and collect more money to pay my preceptor’s fee.’

11.­264

“It so happened then that a girl was walking along the road carrying seven blue lotus flowers, and the young brahmin Megha addressed her: ‘Young girl, where did you get these lotus flowers from?’

11.­265

“She replied, ‘I bought them for five hundred karṣāpaṇa from some gardener’s shop‍—I do not know his name.’

“The young brahmin Megha then said to the girl, ‘Could you give me these flowers that you have bought?’

“ ‘Certainly not,’ she replied.

“He then said, ‘Keep two for yourself, and then I will buy the other five for five hundred karṣāpaṇa.’

“ ‘Why would you do that?’ she asked.

“He replied, ‘I am going to scatter them in honor of the Lord Dīpaṅkara.’

“ ‘I will give them to you,’ she said, ‘if you promise to be my husband throughout all future existences.’

11.­266

“ ‘Certainly not, young girl,’ he replied. ‘I will not promise that. Why? You are wanton and fickle. Young girl, I have to master the unsurpassed innumerable qualities of the buddhas throughout innumerable eons. To do that, I have to give gifts such as coins, jewels, pearls, gems, conches, crystal, coral, silver, and gold. I have to give up such things as elephants, horses, cattle, donkeys, sheep, and even my royal status. I have to give up my carriages. I have to give up my children and my wives. I have to give up my hands. I have to give up my bones, my marrow, and my skull. I have to give up my ears, [F.197.b] my nose, my eyes, [MS.137.b] and my head. In short, young girl, there is no way for me to avoid giving up everything internal and everything external. Young girl, I would even have to give you up. The time has now come for me to follow my conviction and, relying on the teachings of the Tathāgata, leave the household life behind and become a renunciant. Please do not make it difficult, because of your inconsistent and unreliable nature, for me to make an offering.’

11.­267

“She said, ‘Well then, if you cut a piece of flesh the size of a mustard seed from your body and give it to me, I will not make it difficult for you to make an offering.’

11.­268

“ ‘That is fine,’ he said. ‘You will then give me the lotus flowers?’

“ ‘Yes,’ she said. ‘Then I will give them to you.’

11.­269

“The young brahmin Megha acquired the blue lotus flowers in this way, and he then proceeded to where the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, was. The brahmin Megha saw the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, at the head of a crowd of many hundreds of thousands of millions of billions of beings, conducting himself with grace, and so forth, and his devotion for the Lord grew. Because of his devotion, great joy, serenity, and respect arose in him, and with this he approached the Lord Dīpaṅkara.

11.­270

“The young brahmin Megha could see that many people had spread pieces of fine cloth in front of the Lord Dīpaṅkara, and he thought, ‘As I do not have any cloth, I will offer a piece of this deerskin.’ However, people then derided him and scolded him for his offering, saying, ‘How can you offer a deerskin to this jewel-like being?’

11.­271

“The young brahmin Megha went over to one side, offered his deerskin there, and formed the aspiration in his mind, ‘Please accept this Lord, Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, universal seer. May you place your feet on this deerskin.’

11.­272

“The Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, understood, and he thought, ‘I shall place my feet on the young brahmin Megha’s deerskin.’ [F.198.a]

11.­273

“At that, the young brahmin Megha was happy and rejoiced, and he joyfully showered the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara with the blue lotus flowers. Many hundreds of gods showered the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, with divine mandārava flowers, divine blue lotus flowers, divine pink lotus flowers, and divine aromatic sandal powder. Divine music played and divine songs carried forth, all in honor of the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara. The blue lotuses became many thousands of lotus flowers, and this canopy of flowers showered down around the Lord, the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha Dīpaṅkara, falling with petals down and stalks pointing up.

11.­274

“So it was that the young brahmin Megha, with pure intentions, presented the golden-colored locks of hair that he had allowed to grow for twelve years to the Lord Dīpaṅkara and made this firm commitment: ‘Will I become a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished buddha in the future? Lord, please confirm this. Please give me a sign. If the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, does not place his feet on my golden-colored locks of hair, if he does not grant me this confirmation, if he does not give me a prediction of awakening, I will physically wither up.’

11.­275

“At that, Śāriputra, the Lord, the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha Dīpaṅkara, the universal seer, the omniscient one, [MS.138.a] the one for whom nothing in the three times is unknown, understood the intentions of the young brahmin Megha, and so he placed his feet on the young brahmin Megha’s golden-colored locks of hair. Then, with the gaze of an elephant, he looked up and addressed the whole assembly of śrāvakas: ‘Mendicants, you should not step on this hair. [F.198.b] Why not? Mendicants, innumerable eons from now, this young brahmin will become a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished buddha by the name of Śākyamuni.’

11.­276

“So it was, Śāriputra, that the young brahmin Megha received a prediction from the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, and he was so happy and thrilled that he flew up into the sky.

11.­277

“He directly perceived a hundred thousand million billion indescribable concentrations. By means of the power and knowledge of his superior abilities, he could see that to the east there were many more lords, buddhas, than there are grains of sand in the river Ganges, who were making the prediction, ‘Innumerable eons in the future, young brahmin, you will become a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished buddha by the name of Śākyamuni.’ Likewise, to the south, the west, the north, the northeast, the southeast, the southwest, and the northwest, above and below, throughout the ten directions of space, there were many more lords, buddhas than there are grains of sand in the river Ganges, who were making the prediction, ‘Innumerable eons in the future, young brahmin, you will become a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished buddha by the name of Śākyamuni.’

11.­278

“Then, Śāriputra, when the young brahmin Megha had received this prediction, he was greatly inspired and descended from the sky. In the presence of the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, he followed his conviction and left the household life behind to become a renunciant and follow the life of purity.

11.­279

“Now, Śāriputra, no one should entertain any doubt, any uncertainty, about whether the young brahmin named Megha who appeared at this time, on this occasion, was anyone else. Why not? It was I who was the young brahmin named Megha who appeared at that time, on that occasion. [F.199.a] It was I who showered the Lord, the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara, with five blue lotuses and offered my locks of hair.

11.­280

“Therefore, Śāriputra, those bodhisatvas who wish to quickly receive a prediction of awakening should conscientiously study this cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, learn it, recite it, clarify it to others, and teach it in great detail. They should strive to make progress in these things, which represent an approach that has no attributes.

11.­281

“Why should they do this? It is clear to me, Śāriputra, that in the past, after Dīpaṅkara, there was no [MS.138.b] form of good conduct that I did not engage in. Still, the lords, the buddhas, I had encountered before him did not predict my awakening. Why was that? It was because I was practicing by means of attributes. When I started to practice in a way that was free from attributes, though, in a way that had no object, when I started to practice the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva and stabilized the attainment of what I learned from it, the Lord Dīpaṅkara made his prediction about me, saying, ‘Young brahmin, in the future you will become a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished buddha by the name of Śākyamuni.’

11.­282

“Śāriputra, when I saw the tathāgata, the arhat, the fully accomplished Buddha Dīpaṅkara, I passed beyond all practice. I passed beyond all practice just by seeing the tathāgata, the arhat, the fully accomplished Buddha Dīpaṅkara. I realized the vision of the sameness of all phenomena. Just by seeing him, I understood that all phenomena are inherently uncreated. That was when the Tathāgata Dīpaṅkara predicted my awakening, saying, ‘Innumerable eons in the future, young brahmin, you will become a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished buddha by the name of Śākyamuni.’

11.­283

“The moment he had made that prediction, I gained patient acceptance of the fact that phenomena are uncreated. What is the attainment of this patient acceptance like? It is to attain the patient acceptance that form cannot be found. [F.199.b] It is to attain the patient acceptance that feeling, perception, mental conditioning, and consciousness cannot be found. It is to attain the patient acceptance that nothing that is included within the skandhas, the elements, and the sense fields can be found. Another way of describing the attainment of patient acceptance is to say that it is the attainment of a state of non-acceptance. What does this mean? In this teaching on the attainment of patient acceptance there are no worldly phenomena that occur. There are no phenomena related to ordinary beings. There are no phenomena related to those who are in training. There are no phenomena related to those requiring no more training. There are no phenomena related to the bodhisatvas. Even the qualities of the Buddha do not occur. There are no phenomena at all that occur. This is why it is called the attainment of patient acceptance. It is called the attainment of patient acceptance because there is no attainment and no observation of any phenomena. In this patient acceptance, all attributes and all objects are nothing but words. This is why it is said that patient acceptance has been attained. There is no eye here. There is no description of the eye, and so forth. There is no ear, no nose, no tongue, no body, no mind, and no description of the mind. This is the patient acceptance of the place that is intolerable. This is the patient acceptance of the place it is impossible to go to.

11.­284

“Śāriputra, this is why those bodhisatvas who wish to quickly receive a prediction of awakening should conscientiously study this practice of freedom from attributes, the practice of the spontaneous, the practice of having no object, which is contained in the cycle of teachings of The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva. They should learn it, recite it, clarify it to others, and teach it in great detail. They should strive to make progress in these things.” [MS.139.a]

11.­285

Now, in the assembly at that time there was a merchant by the name of Naradatta. Sitting there, in the presence of the Lord, he listened to the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva that describes the characteristics of the buddhas and the characteristics of the bodhisatvas. He then got up from his seat, placed his robe over one shoulder, knelt down on his right knee, [F.200.a] joined his hands in reverence facing in the direction of the Lord, and said, “Lord, the elder Aniruddha has encouraged me and instructed me in the following way: ‘Householder, you must attain the state of an arhat, since this will put an end to aging and death.’ Now that I have listened to this cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva in the presence of the Lord, however, and heard about the characteristics of the buddhas and the characteristics of the bodhisatvas, I have concluded that the Mahāyāna is the best, the most excellent, supreme, superior, and unsurpassed when it comes to unsurpassed perfect awakening. I have heard about it directly from the Lord, including all its detailed teachings, and indeed it is to be cultivated as the very best. Still, when reflecting on it, I also understand that one should not appropriate, identify with, or hold on to each of the detailed dharma-entities. What I should adopt and engage with is the dharma that is the best, the most excellent, supreme, superior, and unsurpassed. In this matter, Lord, it is my view that among all the vehicles, the one that ranks highest is the unsurpassed Buddhayāna. Whatever vehicles there may be, it is the Tathāgatayāna that can be proclaimed as the best among them, and so forth, that can be proclaimed to have nothing that surpasses it. From now on, Lord, I will cultivate the mind of unsurpassed perfect awakening for the sake of the many, for the benefit of the many, for the happiness of the many, for the love of the world, in order to help, benefit, and bring happiness to a great multitude of beings, and for the sake of gods and men. This is how I will train in the bodhisatva training.”

11.­286

When he had said this, the Lord addressed the merchant Naradatta: “Naradatta, unsurpassed perfect awakening is difficult to attain. [F.200.b] It is difficult to accomplish.”

11.­287

He then said, “Lord, even if unsurpassed perfect awakening is difficult to attain and difficult to accomplish, there is a certain type of vigorous approach by means of which I can attain unsurpassed perfect awakening. I must not miss the opportunity to attain unsurpassed perfect awakening. Lord, if it is possible to realize unsurpassed perfect awakening by developing a motivation that is as vast as the number of grains of sand in the river Ganges, then may every single such mind of awakening come about, even if it takes as many eons as there are grains of sand in the river Ganges. Even if my head needs to be cut off as many times as there are grains of sand in the river Ganges in order for every such mind of awakening to arise, I will not abandon unsurpassed perfect awakening but continue to work enthusiastically to attain unsurpassed perfect awakening by means of this cycle of instructions. It goes without saying, Lord, that I will employ all means to fully realize awakening. Why will I do this? Lord, I will do this because unsurpassed perfect awakening is so exalted, the unsurpassed qualities of the buddhas are so exalted, and the knowledge of the lords, the buddhas, is so inconceivable, so unequaled, so unfathomable, so immeasurable, and so unimpeded that it cannot be easily comprehended even if one were to speak a hundred thousand million billion words to try to describe it.”

11.­288

The merchant’s son Naradatta then spoke these verses:

11.­289
“May the mind of awakening arise in me
For thousands of millions of eons,
And may I not give up on sentient beings
For as long as they must suffer all this pain.
11.­290
“For every single moment of this motivation,
May I be willing to sever as many of my heads [MS.139.b]
As it would take to make a heap
The size of the mountain Meru.
11.­291
“For the benefit of all living beings, [F.201.a]
I will apply myself to awakening.
Just as it is for you, Tathāgata,
May this become my sole endeavor.
11.­292
“The Hīnayāna is a lesser vehicle,
And so having left the Śrāvakayāna behind,
May this become my sole endeavor,
Just as it is for you, Tathāgata.
11.­293
“This vehicle is the greater vehicle.
It is praised by the buddhas as supreme,
As the proper approach that is not seen by others.
Thus, I turn toward awakening.
11.­294
“I will protect those who harm others.
I will free them from the three lower realms.
This is why the buddhas
Appear as tathāgatas.”
11.­295

The merchant Naradatta then thought, “I now see the vastness of the Dharma of the Buddha. I see that one cannot properly engage with this Dharma with a wife and children, but such is my lot.” He then honored the Lord by placing his head at his feet. He circumambulated the Lord three times, and then quickly, with great haste, he returned to his house. Then, together with seven wives, seven sons, seven daughters, seven male servants, and seven female servants, carrying a thousand pairs of garments made of calico, and with five hundred musicians, he departed from the city of Rājagṛha to see the Lord. When all the many human and nonhuman inhabitants of Rājagṛha saw that the merchant Naradatta, together with his servants, was departing from the city of Rājagṛha quickly, with great haste, they asked him, “Naradatta, where are you headed with your servants?”

11.­296

He replied, [F.201.b] “Gentlemen. The tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha is now on Vulture’s Peak, surrounded by an assembly that numbers in the hundreds, in the thousands, and he is revealing the boundless qualities of the buddhas in various ways. In order to penetrate the meaning of the boundless qualities of the buddhas and the inconceivable, unparalleled knowledge of the buddhas, I am going, together with my servants, to the place where the tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha is staying, because I do not know how to cultivate the roots of virtue necessary to attain unsurpassed perfect awakening. If you wish to master the boundless qualities of the buddhas, then join me. Come with me to see the Lord. Cultivate roots of virtue with the boundless goal of the boundless qualities of the buddhas.” When the people of Rājagṛha heard Naradatta’s words, ten thousand of them followed him.

11.­297

The merchant Naradatta, together with his seven wives, seven sons, seven daughters, seven male servants, and seven female servants, carrying a thousand pairs of garments made of calico, together with the ten thousand beings who had followed him from the city and five hundred musicians, bringing with him flowers, incense, garlands, ointments, aromatic powders, fabrics, parasols, royal banners, and flags, and playing drums and cymbals, made offerings to the Lord and adorned the body of the Lord with the thousand pairs of calico garments. Then he spoke these verses:

11.­298
“Today I make this offering
To the one who is sublime among sentient beings,
Who practices pure conduct for the sake of supreme awakening,
Whose vision is limitless, the best of those who walk on two feet.
11.­299
“Today I make this offering
To the one who has practiced for many eons in the past,
Searching for awakening to benefit living beings,
The perfect Buddha who has found the supremely powerful Dharma.
11.­300
“With children and servants, and with a host of kinsmen,
I come in search of awakening for the benefit of living beings. [MS.140.a]
Together with these thousands of beings,
I go for refuge to the Buddha and his assembly.”
11.­301

After the merchant Naradatta had praised the Lord with these verses, he then said to the Lord, [F.202.a] “Lord, all of us, myself and this great number of sentient beings, have come to seek an audience with the Lord so that we can set out for unsurpassed perfect awakening. Lord, please teach them the kind of Dharma that they need in order to all be set irreversibly on their way to unsurpassed perfect awakening. Please tell me, Lord, what kinds of roots of virtue I should cultivate before the Lord, what kinds of roots of virtue I will need to attain unsurpassed perfect awakening. May all sentient beings here and now gain access to the kinds of qualities that the Lord possesses.”

11.­302

Then the merchant Naradatta’s seven wives, seven sons, seven daughters, seven male servants, and seven female servants, the ten thousand beings who had followed him from the city, and the five hundred musicians that were there addressed the Lord: “Lord, we go for refuge to the Buddha, the Dharma, and the Saṅgha of mendicants. May the Lord accept us as lay followers. From this day forth, for as long as we live, we will abstain from taking life, we will go for refuge, and we will remain filled with devotion. From this day forth, Lord, we will maintain our commitment to unsurpassed perfect awakening. Just as you have become perfectly awakened, we, too, will attain unsurpassed perfect awakening and teach the Dharma to sentient beings. Just as the Lord now guides his followers, we shall guide our followers. Just as the Lord is now liberating sentient beings from the oppression of suffering, we will liberate sentient beings from the oppression of suffering.” [F.202.b]

11.­303

The five hundred musicians then circumambulated the Lord three times while they played their instruments with great enthusiasm. The ten thousand beings who had come from the city, along with the merchant Naradatta and his whole following‍—his seven wives, his seven sons, his seven daughters, his seven male servants, and his seven female servants, and the five hundred musicians‍—circumambulated the Lord three times.

11.­304

Then the Lord, because of his empathy for these sentient beings, took his seat on a throne that was floating in the sky. The five hundred musicians saw the Lord taking his seat on the throne floating in the sky, and when they saw this, they developed faith, right there in the presence of the Lord. [MS.140.b] Through the power of the Buddha they dropped all the instruments they were holding, and through the power of the Buddha these remained suspended in midair without missing a note. As they played, the instruments circumambulated the Buddha three times while he was seated in midair.

11.­305

The merchant’s son Naradatta, along with his servants, the five hundred musicians, and the ten thousand beings from the city, witnessed this miracle, this display of magical ability, and when they saw it they were happy, they were thrilled, joy arose in them, and they all folded their hands in honor of the Lord. The space around them was filled with the spontaneous sounds of thousands of instruments as far as a yojana away, and the sound of these drums and cymbals was like a swarm of honeybees.

11.­306

In addition to the merchant’s son Naradatta, his servants, the five hundred musicians, and the ten thousand beings from the city who were already there listening to the Dharma, there were six thousand other beings and one thousand two hundred fifty mendicants there, and through the power of the Buddha they all rose up into the sky, and through the power of the Buddha, five five-tiered pavilions appeared in the sky. [F.203.a] The Dharma was then taught in all the pavilions of musicians arranged in the four surrounding tiered pavilions.150 There were many thousands of gods floating in the air showering them with divine mandārava flowers, and through the power of the Buddha, these flowers were transformed into eighty pavilions.

11.­307

As the great host of beings who were suspended in midair witnessed this great and powerful display of magical abilities, their joy, their faith, and their respect for the Lord became even greater. The Lord was aware of the faith possessed by the great host of beings, and when he saw the excellent motivation of the merchant’s son Naradatta and the great host of beings, he then smiled, and so forth. The previous section ending in “and dissolved into the crown of his head” can be inserted here.

11.­308

When the venerable Ānanda saw that the Lord was smiling, he placed his robe over one shoulder, joined his hands in reverence facing in the direction of the Lord, and asked the Lord, “Lord, the lords, the buddhas, do not smile without a reason, without a particular cause. What is the reason for this smile? What is the cause of this smile?” [MS.141.a]

11.­309

The Lord then replied to the venerable Ānanda, “Ānanda, this merchant’s son Naradatta has paid honor to me accompanied by seven wives, seven sons, seven daughters, seven male servants, and seven female servants, and so he will avoid falling into the lower realms for a billion eons and will be reborn as a god or a human being. After twenty billion151 eons he will encounter a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished Buddha named Sārthavāha. When he meets him, he will praise him, venerate him, honor him, and worship him, and then he will avoid falling into the lower realms for another two hundred million eons.

11.­310

“Ānanda, [F.203.b] when the seven wives, seven sons, seven daughters, seven male servants, and seven female servants of the merchant’s son Naradatta die, they will all avoid taking on female forms, and will instead attain the bodies of men. Together with the bodhisatva Naradatta, they will then practice the way of the bodhisatva. They will attain unsurpassed perfect awakening within one eon.

11.­311

“Ānanda, the bodhisatva, the great being Naradatta will become a tathāgata, arhat, fully accomplished buddha by the name of Samacitta. The followers of the bodhisatva Naradatta will all become tathāgatas with various different names. The five hundred musicians that are here will avoid falling into the lower realms for innumerable eons, and I proclaim by way of numbers that they will become billions of kings of the entire world. During that time, they will encounter ten thousand buddhas, and they will praise them, venerate them, honor them, and serve them. All of them will attain unsurpassed complete perfect awakening after one eon. They will all become tathāgatas, arhats, fully accomplished buddhas, and they will all be given the same name. They will all be called Mañjusvara.

11.­312

“Four hundred152 of the ten thousand beings from the city will meet the Tathāgata Maitreya and will then attain final nirvāṇa. The rest of them will avoid falling into the lower realms for as many eons as there are grains of sand in the river Ganges. In due course, they will encounter a billion buddhas, whom they will praise, venerate, honor, and serve, and they will all reach complete and perfect awakening within a single eon. They will all become tathāgatas, arhats, and fully accomplished buddhas, and they will all be given the same name. They will all be called Āścarya. [F.204.a]

11.­313

“After I have attained final nirvāṇa, when the true Dharma has disappeared, when the age of strife has passed, when the tathāgata Maitreya has not yet appeared, when the lifespan of sentient beings increases, and when ten thousand pratyekabuddhas appear, there are one thousand beings among these six thousand beings who will meet these pratyekabuddhas and who will praise them, venerate them, honor them, and serve them. They will meet the supreme man Maitreya, and they will praise him, venerate him, honor him, and serve him. After this they will avoid falling into the lower realms for two hundred thousand million billion eons, and then in their final life, when they attain their final body, [MS.141.b] impelled by their roots of virtue, they will follow their conviction, leave the household life behind to become renunciants, and realize awakening independently.

11.­314

“From among these ten thousand beings, a thousand will reach the insight that is required for the mind of unsurpassed perfect awakening to arise. Six trillion gods will obtain the spotless, pure Dharma-vision of phenomena.

11.­315

“Ānanda, what are those who do not cultivate love, faith, respect, and reverence for the tathāgatas, if not immature children? Why is this? Even those whose roots of virtue are weak may in fact attain the state of greatness. They can reach nirvāṇa.”

11.­316

The Lord then spoke these verses:

11.­317
“Someone who shows reverence for the buddhas
Will attain this kind of glory.
Therefore, you should venerate the teacher.
If you do so, what you give will yield a great result.
11.­318
“If someone venerates those who remain
Or venerates those who have reached nirvāṇa,
Even by offering something as small as a mustard seed,
He will come to see the Tathāgata.
11.­319
“If someone venerates those who remain
Or venerates those who have reached nirvāṇa,
Even by offering something as small as a mustard seed,
The positive effects of their veneration will match their intentions. [F.204.b]
11.­320
“Maintaining a balanced mind
And venerating the supreme man,
He will ripen in the same way,
And he, too, will attain awakening.
11.­321
“He seizes the path leading to good fortune
And abandons the path that leads to misery.
It will not be hard for him to find
The path that takes one toward nirvāṇa.
11.­322
“The Buddha is supreme because of his morality.
The Buddha is supreme because of his concentration.
If one has faith in these supreme things,
One will attain supreme awakening.
11.­323
“By presenting him with supreme offerings,
One will quickly reach the supreme state.
One will become a supreme perfect buddha
And teach the supreme Dharma.
11.­324
“Any wise man who wishes to rely
On the Dharma of the Buddha
Should cultivate a strong motivation
And, by means of great learning, strive to avoid superficiality.
11.­325
“He will become a king of the entire world,
The powerful god Brahmā,
A great source of good qualities,
And he will reach the certainty of nirvāṇa.”
11.­326

The Lord then addressed the venerable Śāriputra, “In this way, Śāriputra, sons and daughters of good family who have entered into the Mahāyāna and wish to quickly attain unsurpassed perfect awakening should cultivate a powerful yearning for the cycle of teachings contained here, in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva. They should study it conscientiously, learn it, memorize it, recite it, absorb it, clarify it to others, and teach it in great detail to others. Why should they do this? They should do this because when they have studied it conscientiously, learned it, memorized it, recited it, absorbed it, clarified it to others, and taught it in great detail to others, they will be certain not to be cut off from the Three Jewels. They will not be separated from the four immeasurables. They will be applying themselves to the six perfections, and they will gather sentient beings around them by employing the four methods for bringing people together. Śāriputra, this cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva is the path of awakening. Why? Unsurpassed [F.205.a] complete perfect awakening is dependent on the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, and moreover, Śāriputra, the wealth of the bodhisatvas is collected within the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva. Therefore, Śāriputra, I myself trained in the cycle of teachings contained in The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva, and that is how I attained the state of being severed from the vices.153

11.­327

“What is it that is perfected in all this? [MS.142.a] It is the final attainment of unsurpassed perfect awakening. The Tathāgata has successfully applied himself to the practice of all these perfections. This is the uninterrupted activity of tathāgatas. This is the attainment of the immeasurable stage that is brought about by employing all good qualities. This is the Tathāgata’s attainment of the immeasurables. This is the attainment of all the perfections. In this way, one is established in all the perfections.”

11.­328

The Lord then spoke these verses:

11.­329
“One should know things from the perspective of actions
And from the perspective of the maturation of actions.
That which is neither action nor ripening
Is tranquility; it is nirvāṇa.
11.­330
“The suffering inherent in all conditioned things
Will be found wherever knowledge is absent.
Therefore one should cultivate knowledge.
This is what brings liberation from all conditioned things.”
11.­331

When the Lord had spoken, the venerable Śāriputra, the mendicants, and the world with its gods, humans, asuras, and gandharvas rejoiced and praised the words of the Lord.

11.­332

This concludes the cycle of teachings entitled “The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva,” a Mahāyāna sūtra. It is the twelfth chapter of the hundred thousand chapters of the noble Great Heap of Jewels collection.154


c.

Colophon

c.­1

This was translated into Tibetan by the Indian preceptors Ācārya Surendra, Śīlendra, and Ācārya Dharmatāśīla [F.205.b] and revised according to the later language reform.


ab.

Abbreviations

Akṣ Akṣayamati­nirdeśa­sūtra (Braarvig 1996)
Chi Chinese; see Dh and Xu.
D Degé Kangyur
Dh Chinese translation of the Bodhisatva­piṭaka by Dharmarakṣa 法護 法護 (2) (1018–58 ᴄᴇ), Foshuo dashengpusacangzhengfajing 佛說大乘菩薩藏正法經, in Taishō 316.
MS Sanskrit manuscript of the Bodhisatva­piṭaka (Liland et al., forthcoming).
Q Peking 1737 (Qianlong) Kangyur.
Skt Sanskrit; see MS.
Taishō Taishō Shinshū Daizōkyō 大正新修大藏經, Tokyo 1926–34.
Tib Tibetan translation of the Bodhisatva­piṭaka by Surendrabodhi, Śīlendrabodhi, and Dharmatāśīla (9th century ᴄᴇ), ’phags pa byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod ces bya ba thegs chen po’i mdo.
Xu Chinese translation of the Bodhisatva­piṭaka by Xuanzang 玄奘 (645 ᴄᴇ), da pu sa cang jing 大菩薩藏經, in Taishō 310(12).

n.

Notes

n.­1
We prefer to follow the mainstream Buddhist Sanskrit usage of manuscripts and inscriptions by spelling bodhisatva with a single rather than a double t, the latter being a convention of modern editors. See Gouriswar Bhattacharya, “How to Justify the Spelling of the Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Term Bodhisatva?” in From Turfan to Ajanta: Festschrift for Dieter Schlingloff on the Occasion of his Eightieth Birthday, ed. Eli Franco and Monika Zin (Rupandehi: Lumbini International Research Institute, 2010), 2:35–50. Note that this is also the spelling used in Gāndhārī, as well as in Khotanese, Tibetan lexicography, and old Thai documents.
n.­2
Liland et al., forthcoming.
n.­3
In Braarvig and Pagel 2006.
n.­4
Braarvig and Pagel 2006.
n.­5
Liland et al., forthcoming.
n.­6
This homage to Mañjuśrī is only included in MS.
n.­7
This sentence is missing in Tib.
n.­8
According to Tib and Chi, “You do not strike your ankles against each other when you walk.”
n.­101
Part of this sentence (D: bdud dang bdud kyi ris kyi lha’i bu rnams dang / de ma yin ba gzhan phas kyi rgol ba thams cad kyis, “to attacks by Māra and his retinue, the gods, and all other opponents”) is not found in MS.
n.­121
This aspect of learning is not in the Sanskrit but is repeated later when the same list is returned to.
n.­122
This clause is missing in the Tibetan.
n.­123
The meaning of line one seems clear, but the Tibetan reading is divergent‍—D: mis ni chos rnyed stong par mi byed do; Q: chos rnyed stong pa nyid du mi byed min. In line 2, Skt has samādhi, whereas Tib has rlom sems. We follow the Sanskrit here.
n.­124
These two sentences are missing in MS.
n.­125
This sentence is missing in MS.
n.­126
“Acts of desire in the past” is not found in Tib.
n.­127
MS has adrutā vispaṣṭā, but Tib (both D and Q) only has brtags pa ma yin, perhaps a mistake for brtabs pa ma yin.
n.­128
The Tibetan and Chinese translations differ on the reading of this sentence, and although opposite in meaning, it seems that both ways of understanding it are possible. We have, however, chosen to follow the Sanskrit reading. MS: yā paṃcasūpādāna­skandheṣv aprati­ṣṭhitatā jñānaskandhaparijñedam; D: gang len pa’i phung po lnga rnams la gnas pa/ rnam par shes pa’i phung po yongs su shes pa; Xu: 是名為識不應依趣; Dh: 謂若了知所取五蘊.
n.­129
This paragraph does not occur in MS.
n.­130
In MS, ˚ādvay[ā]˚ is missing.
n.­131
MS has dharmajñānaṃ.
n.­132
Not in MS; D: nges par gyur pa; Q: skyon med pa.
n.­133
MS: aprāptā; Tib: thob pa.
n.­134
There is a play on words here that is lost in translation, as the word we have translated as “phenomena” is dharma.
n.­135
Skt alpabhāṣyatā not in Tib.
n.­136
This is a bit obscure to us, and we have not found a reference to support this understanding.
n.­137
MS: kamanīyatā; Tib: yid du ’ong ba agrees, but Akṣ (p. 550) has las su rung ba (karmaṇyatā; “adeptness”) when providing the same list, which makes more sense.
n.­138
Skt: āraṃbaṇa; Tib: sgrib pa. We have chosen to follow the Sanskrit; the parallel passage in Akṣ has sgrib pa.
n.­139
Both Skt and Tib agree on dhyānavimokṣair, but Chi has 彼對治/所對治, and the same sentence in Akṣ has bsam gtan dang mi mthun pa’i phyogs, which would suggest dhyānavipakṣair.
n.­140
Skt, D, and Q all differ here, and we follow Skt. The anomaly in Q might be a misspelling.
n.­141
The text seems to imply the opposite, but we have chosen this interpretation as Akṣ reads in this way, and it seems to make more sense.
n.­142
There seems to be considerable difference between the different texts here, and this reading follows the Sanskrit.
n.­143
There is some discrepancy between the Sanskrit and Tibetan here, and this reading follows the Sanskrit, which is supported by the same phrase in Akṣ.
n.­144
MS and Q have this reading, but D has the opposite. In Akṣ the same divergence between Tibetan versions is found.
n.­145
MS has anāśrayā, but Tib has zag pa med pa (anāsravā); in light of the interpretation of Akṣ (mi gnas pa), we have chosen to follow the Sanskrit reading.
n.­146
In Xu this is the end of the eleventh chapter, and the following twelfth chapter is entitled 大自在天授記 (“The Prediction of Awakening of Maheśvara”).
n.­147
Skt, Tib, and Dh all have bodhi instead of bhoga, but Xu reads in this way, suggesting later corruption of the passage. Akṣ also presents the same point as Xu, and as this seems to make more sense we have chosen to follow this reading.
n.­148
The Sanskrit actually spells this name Dīpavati in this paragraph, but since it is later spelled Dīpapati, we have chosen this latter spelling throughout for clarity.
n.­149
This is a reference to the single yoke and the blind turtle and is elaborated upon in Xu: 又似盲龜難遇浮孔百千大劫時或一遇我今奉見甚為希有.
n.­150
The exact nature of this structure is not certain, and the two Chinese translations both give different interpretations. The translation here follows the Tibetan. The Sanskrit for this has not yet been established, and when this becomes available it will become clearer.
n.­151
This follows Skt. Tib has a smaller number. The same applies for the next reference.
n.­152
As this says four hundred, and not four thousand, the numbers do not add up in the following section. All available versions, however, agree on this number (except Dh, who has five hundred).
n.­153
Q has dbul po shin tu chad pa, but this is not supported by any of the other versions.
n.­154
This information, as well as the following colophon, is found in Tib, but not in MS.

b.

Bibliography

byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod (Bodhisatva­piṭaka). Degé Kangyur, vols. 40–41 (dkon brtsegs, kha–ga), folios 255.b (kha)–205.b (ga).

byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod (Bodhisatva­piṭaka). Peking 1737 (Qianlong) Kangyur, vols. 51–52 (dkon brtsegs, dzi–wi), folios 281.b (dzi)–234.a (wi).

byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod. bka’ ’gyur (dpe bsdur ma) [Comparative Edition of the Kangyur], krung go’i bod rig pa zhib ’jug ste gnas kyi bka’ bstan dpe sdur khang (The Tibetan Tripitaka Collation Bureau of the China Tibetology Research Center). 108 volumes. Beijing: krung go’i bod rig pa dpe skrun khang (China Tibetology Publishing House), 2006–9, vol. 40, p. 737–vol. 41, p. 503.

Baums, Stefan et al. “The Bodhisattvapiṭakasūtra in Gāndhārī.” In Buddhist Manuscripts Volume IV, edited by Jens Braarvig et al., 267–82. Manuscripts in the Schøyen Collection. Oslo: Hermes, 2016.

Braarvig, Jens. Akṣayamati­nirdeśa­sūtra. 2 vols. Oslo: Solum Forlag, 1996.

Braarvig, Jens, and Ulrich Pagel. “Fragments of the Bodhisattvapiṭakasūtra.” In Buddhist Manuscripts Volume III, edited by Jens Braarvig et al., 11–88. Buddhist Manuscripts in the Schøyen Collection. Oslo: Hermes, 2006.

Edgerton, Franklin. Buddhist Hybrid Sanskrit Grammar and Dictionary. 2 vols. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass, 1953.

Liland, Fredrik et al. Bodhisatva­piṭaka: A Critical Edition. Sanskrit Texts from the Tibetan Autonomous Region (STTAR). Vienna: Österreichische Akademie der Wissenschaften, forthcoming.

Pagel, Ulrich. The Bodhisattvapiṭaka: Its Doctrines, Practices and Their Position in Mahāyāna Literature. Tring: Institute of Buddhist Studies, 1995.

Pedersen, Kusumita Priscilla. “The ‘Dhyāna’ Chapter of the ‘Bodhisattvapiṭaka-sūtra.’ ” PhD diss., Columbia University, 1976.


g.

Glossary

Types of attestation for names and terms of the corresponding source language

AS

Attested in source text

This term is attested in a manuscript used as a source for this translation.

AO

Attested in other text

This term is attested in other manuscripts with a parallel or similar context.

AD

Attested in dictionary

This term is attested in dictionaries matching Tibetan to the corresponding language.

AA

Approximate attestation

The attestation of this name is approximate. It is based on other names where the relationship between the Tibetan and source language is attested in dictionaries or other manuscripts.

RP

Reconstruction from Tibetan phonetic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the Tibetan phonetic rendering of the term.

RS

Reconstruction from Tibetan semantic rendering

This term is a reconstruction based on the semantics of the Tibetan translation.

SU

Source unspecified

This term has been supplied from an unspecified source, which most often is a widely trusted dictionary.

g.­1

Abhiyaśa

Wylie:
  • grags pa
Tibetan:
  • གྲགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhiyaśa AS

The father of the future buddha Kāruṇika.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 9.­164
g.­2

Abhyudgata

Wylie:
  • mngon par ’phags
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་པར་འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • abhyudgata AS

A buddha in the distant past.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­203-204
  • 9.­231
  • 9.­243
  • 9.­257
  • 9.­261
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­274
  • g.­345
g.­3

abode of limitless consciousness

Wylie:
  • rnam shes mtha’ yas skye mched
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་ཤེས་མཐའ་ཡས་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • vijñānānaṃ­tyāyatana AS

The fifth of the eight liberations.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­228
  • g.­243
g.­4

abode of limitless space

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ mtha’ yas skye mched
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་མཐའ་ཡས་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • akāśānaṃ­tyāyatana AS

The fourth of the eight liberations.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­228
  • g.­243
g.­5

abode of neither perception nor nonperception

Wylie:
  • ’du shes med ’du shes med min skye mched
Tibetan:
  • འདུ་ཤེས་མེད་འདུ་ཤེས་མེད་མིན་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • naivasaṃjñānā­saṃjñāyatana AS

The seventh of the eight liberations.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­228
  • g.­243
g.­6

abode of nothing whatsoever

Wylie:
  • ci yang med pa’i skye mched
Tibetan:
  • ཅི་ཡང་མེད་པའི་སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • ākiñcanyāyatana AS

The sixth of the eight liberations.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­228
  • g.­243
g.­7

Ācārya Dharmatāśīla

Wylie:
  • chos nyid tshul khrims
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཉིད་ཚུལ་ཁྲིམས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmatāśīla

The 9th century Tibetan translator of this text.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • c.­1
g.­8

action

Wylie:
  • las
Tibetan:
  • ལས།
Sanskrit:
  • karma AS

See “karma.”

Located in 82 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­48
  • 1.­69
  • 1.­74-75
  • 1.­81
  • 1.­128
  • 1.­131
  • 1.­163
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­24-25
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­93
  • 4.­102
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­138
  • 4.­146-149
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­153-154
  • 4.­156-157
  • 4.­204
  • 4.­224
  • 4.­234
  • 4.­256
  • 4.­260
  • 4.­268
  • 4.­299
  • 4.­302
  • 4.­314
  • 5.­26
  • 6.­4
  • 6.­12
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­55
  • 7.­75
  • 7.­101
  • 7.­120
  • 7.­123
  • 7.­125
  • 7.­127
  • 7.­142
  • 7.­203
  • 7.­207
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­334
  • 7.­348
  • 7.­357
  • 8.­3
  • 8.­55
  • 9.­43
  • 9.­172
  • 9.­180
  • 9.­260
  • 10.­8-9
  • 10.­12
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­24
  • 10.­27
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­95
  • 11.­102-103
  • 11.­106
  • 11.­124
  • 11.­145
  • 11.­149
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­183
  • 11.­329
  • n.­71
  • g.­75
  • g.­248
  • g.­255
  • g.­354
  • g.­374
g.­13

age

Wylie:
  • bskal pa
Tibetan:
  • བསྐལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalpa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A cosmic period of time, sometimes equivalent to the time when a world system appears, exists, and disappears. According to the traditional Abhidharma understanding of cyclical time, a great eon (mahākalpa) is divided into eighty lesser eons. In the course of one great eon, the universe takes form and later disappears. During the first twenty of the lesser eons, the universe is in the process of creation and expansion; during the next twenty it remains; during the third twenty, it is in the process of destruction; and during the last quarter of the cycle, it remains in a state of empty stasis. A fortunate, or good, eon (bhadrakalpa) refers to any eon in which more than one buddha appears.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­206
  • 9.­71
  • 11.­313
g.­16

analytical ability

Wylie:
  • so so yang dag par rig pa
Tibetan:
  • སོ་སོ་ཡང་དག་པར་རིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratisamvid AS

May refer to the four analytical abilities, listed here as analytical ability in relation to objects, analytical ability in relation to phenomena, analytical ability in relation to language, and analytical ability in relation to eloquence.

Located in 18 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­15
  • 4.­402
  • 7.­213
  • 9.­14
  • 9.­260
  • 9.­370
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­56
  • 11.­71-76
  • 11.­78-80
g.­17

Ānanda

Wylie:
  • kun dga’ bo
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་དགའ་བོ།
Sanskrit:
  • ānanda AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A major śrāvaka disciple and personal attendant of the Buddha Śākyamuni during the last twenty-five years of his life. He was a cousin of the Buddha (according to the Mahāvastu, he was a son of Śuklodana, one of the brothers of King Śuddhodana, which means he was a brother of Devadatta; other sources say he was a son of Amṛtodana, another brother of King Śuddhodana, which means he would have been a brother of Aniruddha).

Ānanda, having always been in the Buddha’s presence, is said to have memorized all the teachings he heard and is celebrated for having recited all the Buddha’s teachings by memory at the first council of the Buddhist saṅgha, thus preserving the teachings after the Buddha’s parinirvāṇa. The phrase “Thus did I hear at one time,” found at the beginning of the sūtras, usually stands for his recitation of the teachings. He became a patriarch after the passing of Mahākāśyapa.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­12
  • 2.­64-65
  • 11.­308-311
  • 11.­315
g.­19

Aniruddha

Wylie:
  • ma ’gags pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་འགགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • aniruddha AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Lit. “Unobstructed.” One of the ten great śrāvaka disciples, famed for his meditative prowess and superknowledges. He was the Buddha's cousin‍—a son of Amṛtodana, one of the brothers of King Śuddhodana‍—and is often mentioned along with his two brothers Bhadrika and Mahānāma. Some sources also include Ānanda among his brothers.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­285
  • n.­83
g.­21

arhat

Wylie:
  • dgra bcom pa
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་བཅོམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • arhat AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to Buddhist tradition, one who is worthy of worship (pūjām arhati), or one who has conquered the enemies, the mental afflictions (kleśa-ari-hata-vat), and reached liberation from the cycle of rebirth and suffering. It is the fourth and highest of the four fruits attainable by śrāvakas. Also used as an epithet of the Buddha.

Located in 108 passages in the translation:

  • i.­11
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­5-6
  • 1.­210-211
  • 1.­214
  • 2.­20
  • 3.­1-2
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­47
  • 4.­62-63
  • 4.­65
  • 4.­67
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­97-99
  • 4.­108
  • 4.­112-113
  • 4.­116
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­140
  • 4.­145-146
  • 4.­149
  • 4.­171
  • 4.­423
  • 5.­2-3
  • 6.­13
  • 6.­15-16
  • 7.­218-219
  • 7.­221-222
  • 7.­248-249
  • 7.­290
  • 7.­292
  • 7.­306
  • 7.­322
  • 8.­7-8
  • 9.­6
  • 9.­20
  • 9.­66
  • 9.­77
  • 9.­79
  • 9.­112
  • 9.­114
  • 9.­133-134
  • 9.­136
  • 9.­144
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­166
  • 9.­170
  • 9.­177
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­203-204
  • 9.­231
  • 9.­243
  • 9.­257
  • 9.­274
  • 9.­282
  • 9.­284
  • 9.­286
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­304
  • 9.­312
  • 9.­354
  • 9.­356
  • 9.­362
  • 9.­369-370
  • 9.­372-373
  • 10.­9
  • 11.­99
  • 11.­233-236
  • 11.­241-242
  • 11.­252
  • 11.­255-256
  • 11.­262
  • 11.­273-275
  • 11.­277
  • 11.­281-282
  • 11.­285
  • 11.­296
  • 11.­309
  • 11.­311-312
  • g.­255
g.­22

Āścarya

Wylie:
  • ngo mtshar
Tibetan:
  • ངོ་མཚར།
Sanskrit:
  • āścarya AS

The name of four hundred beings from the city of Rājagṛha when they attain Buddhahood in the distant future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­312
g.­23

ascetic

Wylie:
  • dge sbyong
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སྦྱོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • śramaṇa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A general term applied to spiritual practitioners who live as ascetic mendicants. In Buddhist texts, the term usually refers to Buddhist monastics, but it can also designate a practitioner from other ascetic/monastic spiritual traditions. In this context śramaṇa is often contrasted with the term brāhmaṇa (bram ze), which refers broadly to followers of the Vedic tradition. Any renunciate, not just a Buddhist, could be referred to as a śramaṇa if they were not within the Vedic fold. The epithet Great Śramaṇa is often applied to the Buddha.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 1.­2-3
  • 1.­5-6
  • 1.­123
  • 1.­186
  • 2.­76
  • 3.­16
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­97
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­145
  • 4.­159
  • 4.­171
  • 4.­279
  • 4.­281
  • 4.­320
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­423
  • 5.­2
  • 6.­2
  • 7.­120
  • 7.­211
  • 7.­253
  • 9.­179
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­25
g.­26

asura

Wylie:
  • lha ma yin
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ་མ་ཡིན།
Sanskrit:
  • asura AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A type of nonhuman being whose precise status is subject to different views, but is included as one of the six classes of beings in the sixfold classification of realms of rebirth. In the Buddhist context, asuras are powerful beings said to be dominated by envy, ambition, and hostility. They are also known in the pre-Buddhist and pre-Vedic mythologies of India and Iran, and feature prominently in Vedic and post-Vedic Brahmanical mythology, as well as in the Buddhist tradition. In these traditions, asuras are often described as being engaged in interminable conflict with the devas (gods).

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2-3
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­57
  • 2.­76
  • 3.­22
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­97
  • 5.­2
  • 7.­210
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­113
  • 9.­365
  • 9.­367-368
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­12
  • 11.­180
  • 11.­331
  • g.­412
g.­27

attribute

Wylie:
  • mtshan ma
Tibetan:
  • མཚན་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • nimitta AS

Located in 47 passages in the translation:

  • i.­11
  • 1.­161
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­23
  • 3.­32
  • 4.­3
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­238
  • 4.­284
  • 4.­309
  • 4.­326
  • 4.­345
  • 4.­348
  • 4.­351
  • 4.­354-356
  • 4.­365
  • 5.­13
  • 7.­185-186
  • 7.­216
  • 7.­219
  • 8.­57-58
  • 8.­60
  • 10.­22
  • 10.­38
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­48
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­72-73
  • 11.­97
  • 11.­112
  • 11.­132-133
  • 11.­158
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­191
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­280-281
  • 11.­283-284
  • g.­371
g.­29

awakened

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • buddha AS

Describes someone who has attained the highest goal of Buddhism. Also rendered here as “buddha.”

Located in 36 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 1.­5
  • 1.­111
  • 4.­285
  • 4.­341
  • 4.­369
  • 4.­388
  • 4.­391
  • 5.­2
  • 6.­15-16
  • 6.­25
  • 7.­129
  • 7.­290
  • 7.­322
  • 8.­7-8
  • 9.­77
  • 9.­131
  • 9.­191
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­282
  • 9.­284
  • 9.­289
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­312
  • 9.­354
  • 9.­372
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­33
  • 11.­236
  • 11.­252
  • 11.­302
  • g.­112
  • g.­119
  • g.­365
g.­30

become a renunciant

Wylie:
  • rab tu byung
  • rab byung
  • mngon par byung
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་བྱུང་།
  • རབ་བྱུང་།
  • མངོན་པར་བྱུང་།
Sanskrit:
  • pra√vraj AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit pravrajyā literally means “going forth,” with the sense of leaving the life of a householder and embracing the life of a renunciant. When the term is applied more technically, it refers to the act of becoming a male novice (śrāmaṇera; dge tshul) or female novice (śrāmaṇerikā; dge tshul ma), this being a first stage leading to full ordination.

Located in 52 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 1.­10
  • 1.­38
  • 1.­42
  • 1.­49
  • 1.­54
  • 1.­62
  • 1.­70
  • 1.­76
  • 1.­83
  • 1.­91
  • 1.­98-100
  • 1.­104-106
  • 1.­108
  • 1.­110-111
  • 1.­124
  • 1.­165
  • 1.­196
  • 1.­208-209
  • 2.­28
  • 3.­22
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­225-226
  • 8.­21
  • 9.­151
  • 9.­192
  • 9.­230
  • 9.­251
  • 9.­256
  • 9.­261
  • 9.­280-282
  • 9.­299
  • 9.­356
  • 9.­363
  • 9.­365
  • 9.­367
  • 9.­371
  • 11.­214
  • 11.­252
  • 11.­266
  • 11.­278
  • 11.­313
g.­31

becoming

Wylie:
  • srid pa
Tibetan:
  • སྲིད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhava AS

The tenth of the twelve links of dependent origination.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­115
  • 1.­120
  • 1.­141-142
  • 1.­144-145
  • 1.­169
  • 1.­171
  • 1.­178
  • 1.­180
  • 1.­200
  • 3.­18
  • 4.­224
  • 4.­284
  • 4.­288
  • 5.­15
  • 9.­298
  • 11.­70
  • 11.­183
g.­37

bodhisatva

Wylie:
  • byang chub sems dpa’
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས་དཔའ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhisatva AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A being who is dedicated to the cultivation and fulfilment of the altruistic intention to attain perfect buddhahood, traversing the ten bodhisattva levels (daśabhūmi, sa bcu). Bodhisattvas purposely opt to remain within cyclic existence in order to liberate all sentient beings, instead of simply seeking personal freedom from suffering. In terms of the view, they realize both the selflessness of persons and the selflessness of phenomena.

Located in 443 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­1
  • i.­4-5
  • i.­9
  • i.­11-12
  • 1.­1
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­42
  • 2.­48
  • 2.­64
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­7
  • 3.­10
  • 3.­12
  • 3.­14-16
  • 3.­21
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­28
  • 3.­30
  • 3.­33-34
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­14
  • 4.­17
  • 4.­19
  • 4.­29-30
  • 4.­32
  • 4.­43-44
  • 4.­55
  • 4.­62
  • 4.­68
  • 4.­77
  • 4.­80
  • 4.­106-108
  • 4.­116
  • 4.­123-124
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­140
  • 4.­149
  • 4.­162
  • 4.­175
  • 4.­205
  • 4.­211
  • 4.­229
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­257-258
  • 4.­264
  • 4.­269
  • 4.­280-281
  • 4.­283
  • 4.­286
  • 4.­290
  • 4.­304
  • 4.­321
  • 4.­339-340
  • 4.­358
  • 4.­376-377
  • 4.­386
  • 4.­396-398
  • 4.­422
  • 4.­424
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­4-5
  • 5.­7-27
  • 5.­29-30
  • 6.­1-12
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­18
  • 6.­33
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­5-6
  • 7.­10
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­27-29
  • 7.­41-42
  • 7.­44
  • 7.­54-56
  • 7.­66-68
  • 7.­83-85
  • 7.­99-102
  • 7.­106
  • 7.­112
  • 7.­119-121
  • 7.­135-137
  • 7.­150-153
  • 7.­160
  • 7.­166
  • 7.­173-175
  • 7.­191-194
  • 7.­203-204
  • 7.­206-211
  • 7.­213-215
  • 7.­219
  • 7.­250-256
  • 7.­285
  • 7.­288-289
  • 7.­291-292
  • 7.­294
  • 7.­306
  • 7.­332-333
  • 7.­344-347
  • 7.­372-375
  • 8.­1-5
  • 8.­11
  • 8.­20
  • 8.­23-24
  • 8.­44
  • 8.­46
  • 8.­50
  • 8.­54-57
  • 8.­61
  • 9.­1-8
  • 9.­10-11
  • 9.­40
  • 9.­164-180
  • 9.­191
  • 9.­194
  • 9.­198
  • 9.­200
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­267
  • 9.­271-272
  • 9.­283-285
  • 9.­300-307
  • 9.­310-311
  • 9.­328
  • 9.­332-333
  • 9.­335
  • 9.­337-339
  • 9.­348-349
  • 9.­351-353
  • 9.­355-356
  • 9.­368
  • 9.­370
  • 9.­372
  • 9.­374-375
  • 10.­1-4
  • 10.­6-29
  • 10.­48
  • 10.­51
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­3-4
  • 11.­17-18
  • 11.­25-26
  • 11.­35-36
  • 11.­41-45
  • 11.­47-48
  • 11.­50-56
  • 11.­58
  • 11.­61-66
  • 11.­68-73
  • 11.­80-83
  • 11.­86-87
  • 11.­99
  • 11.­101-104
  • 11.­106
  • 11.­119-122
  • 11.­124-125
  • 11.­128-136
  • 11.­144-145
  • 11.­153-155
  • 11.­160-162
  • 11.­165-168
  • 11.­173-176
  • 11.­178-183
  • 11.­186-187
  • 11.­193-194
  • 11.­196-197
  • 11.­203
  • 11.­217-218
  • 11.­229
  • 11.­231
  • 11.­241
  • 11.­247
  • 11.­252
  • 11.­255
  • 11.­262
  • 11.­280
  • 11.­283-285
  • 11.­310-311
  • 11.­326
  • n.­1
  • n.­74
  • n.­104
  • n.­115
  • g.­67
  • g.­68
  • g.­97
  • g.­200
  • g.­261
  • g.­292
  • g.­313
  • g.­318
  • g.­319
  • g.­324
  • g.­327
  • g.­337
  • g.­341
  • g.­359
  • g.­374
  • g.­391
g.­39

Brahmā

Wylie:
  • tshangs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahman AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A high-ranking deity presiding over a divine world; he is also considered to be the lord of the Sahā world (our universe). Though not considered a creator god in Buddhism, Brahmā occupies an important place as one of two gods (the other being Indra/Śakra) said to have first exhorted the Buddha Śākyamuni to teach the Dharma. The particular heavens found in the form realm over which Brahmā rules are often some of the most sought-after realms of higher rebirth in Buddhist literature. Since there are many universes or world systems, there are also multiple Brahmās presiding over them. His most frequent epithets are “Lord of the Sahā World” (sahāṃpati) and Great Brahmā (mahābrahman).

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­121
  • 4.­31
  • 4.­34
  • 4.­70
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­393
  • 5.­7
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­12
  • 7.­227
  • 8.­55
  • 9.­5
  • 9.­203
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­23
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­199
  • 11.­325
  • n.­43
  • g.­38
  • g.­43
  • g.­44
  • g.­45
g.­43

Brahmakāyika

Wylie:
  • tshangs ris
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmakāyika AS

The first god realm of form, meaning “Stratum of Brahmā,” it is the lowest of the three heavens that make up the first meditative state.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­63
  • g.­243
g.­46

brahmin

Wylie:
  • bram ze
Tibetan:
  • བྲམ་ཟེ།
Sanskrit:
  • brāhmaṇa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A member of the highest of the four castes in Indian society, which is closely associated with religious vocations.

Located in 49 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­11
  • 1.­2-3
  • 2.­76
  • 3.­16
  • 4.­30
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­97
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­145
  • 4.­159
  • 4.­171
  • 4.­279
  • 4.­281
  • 4.­320
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­423
  • 5.­2
  • 6.­2
  • 7.­120
  • 9.­195
  • 10.­20
  • 11.­244
  • 11.­246
  • 11.­257-261
  • 11.­263-265
  • 11.­269-279
  • 11.­281-282
  • g.­70
  • g.­216
  • g.­278
g.­47

Buddhayāna

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas kyi theg pa
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཐེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • buddhayāna AS

The vehicle of the buddhas.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­367
  • 11.­285
g.­49

calm abiding meditation

Wylie:
  • zhi gnas
Tibetan:
  • ཞི་གནས།
Sanskrit:
  • śamatha AS

One of the basic forms of Buddhist meditation, which focuses on calming the mind. Often presented as part of a pair of meditation techniques, the other technique being “insight meditation.”

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­225
  • 4.­236
  • 4.­308
  • 9.­173
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­26
  • 10.­28
  • 11.­48
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­155-156
  • 11.­161
g.­51

cessation

Wylie:
  • ’gog pa
  • ’gag pa
  • zad pa
Tibetan:
  • འགོག་པ།
  • འགག་པ།
  • ཟད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirodha AS
  • kṣaya AS

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­153
  • 1.­169
  • 1.­171
  • 4.­184
  • 4.­225
  • 4.­227-228
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­367
  • 7.­136
  • 7.­139
  • 10.­21
  • 10.­26
  • 10.­28
  • 11.­65
  • 11.­67-70
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­149
  • 11.­159
  • g.­245
  • g.­380
g.­52

characteristic marks of a great being

Wylie:
  • skyes bu chen po’i mtshan
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེས་བུ་ཆེན་པོའི་མཚན།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāpuruṣa­lakṣaṇa AS

See “thirty-two characteristics of a great being.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­12
  • 9.­169
  • 11.­258-259
g.­54

concentration

Wylie:
  • ting nge ’dzin
Tibetan:
  • ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན།
Sanskrit:
  • samādhi AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In a general sense, samādhi can describe a number of different meditative states. In the Mahāyāna literature, in particular in the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras, we find extensive lists of different samādhis, numbering over one hundred.

In a more restricted sense, and when understood as a mental state, samādhi is defined as the one-pointedness of the mind (cittaikāgratā), the ability to remain on the same object over long periods of time. The Drajor Bamponyipa (sgra sbyor bam po gnyis pa) commentary on the Mahāvyutpatti explains the term samādhi as referring to the instrument through which mind and mental states “get collected,” i.e., it is by the force of samādhi that the continuum of mind and mental states becomes collected on a single point of reference without getting distracted.

Located in 100 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • 1.­69
  • 1.­73
  • 1.­131
  • 3.­13
  • 3.­32
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­8
  • 4.­14-15
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­80-83
  • 4.­87
  • 4.­98-99
  • 4.­101
  • 4.­103
  • 4.­106
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­189
  • 4.­199
  • 4.­228-229
  • 4.­297
  • 4.­299
  • 4.­311
  • 4.­313-315
  • 4.­317
  • 4.­354
  • 4.­383
  • 4.­389
  • 4.­393-394
  • 4.­409
  • 5.­14
  • 6.­7
  • 6.­9
  • 6.­13
  • 7.­210
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­216-218
  • 9.­5
  • 9.­164
  • 10.­2
  • 10.­5
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­22-23
  • 10.­25
  • 10.­27-28
  • 10.­32-40
  • 10.­42-45
  • 10.­47-48
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­36
  • 11.­48
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­110
  • 11.­130
  • 11.­136
  • 11.­141-142
  • 11.­145
  • 11.­147
  • 11.­153
  • 11.­163
  • 11.­167
  • 11.­171-172
  • 11.­175
  • 11.­179
  • 11.­277
  • 11.­322
  • g.­75
  • g.­91
  • g.­94
  • g.­98
  • g.­248
  • g.­354
  • g.­356
g.­55

conceptualization

Wylie:
  • rnam par rtog pa
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་རྟོག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vikalpa AS

Thought constructions.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­51
  • 4.­61
  • 4.­104
  • 4.­227
  • 7.­287
  • 9.­342
  • 10.­1-2
  • 10.­50
  • 11.­126
g.­57

consciousness

Wylie:
  • rnam par shes pa
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་ཤེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vijñāna AS

The cognizant quality of the mind.

Located in 63 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­138-139
  • 1.­141
  • 1.­151-152
  • 1.­161
  • 1.­164
  • 1.­166-167
  • 1.­170
  • 1.­189
  • 1.­198-200
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­20
  • 3.­26
  • 4.­15-16
  • 4.­48-55
  • 4.­99
  • 4.­173
  • 4.­179-180
  • 4.­224
  • 4.­228
  • 4.­234
  • 4.­345-347
  • 4.­350
  • 4.­353
  • 4.­394
  • 5.­14
  • 7.­286
  • 7.­339
  • 7.­344
  • 9.­345
  • 10.­10
  • 10.­13
  • 11.­49
  • 11.­55-57
  • 11.­59
  • 11.­82
  • 11.­87-93
  • 11.­183
  • 11.­283
  • g.­100
g.­58

corruption

Wylie:
  • kun nas nyon mongs
  • kun nas nyon mongs pa
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ནས་ཉོན་མོངས།
  • ཀུན་ནས་ཉོན་མོངས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃkleśa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A term meaning defilement, impurity, and pollution, broadly referring to cognitive and emotional factors that disturb and obscure the mind. As the self-perpetuating process of affliction in the minds of beings, it is a synonym for saṃsāra. It is often paired with its opposite, vyavadāna, meaning “purification.”

Located in 23 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­83
  • 1.­85
  • 1.­90
  • 1.­133
  • 1.­185
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­168
  • 4.­223-224
  • 4.­229
  • 4.­234
  • 7.­136
  • 8.­57-58
  • 9.­334
  • 10.­16
  • 11.­96
  • 11.­124
  • 11.­133
  • 11.­140-141
  • 11.­164
  • n.­147
g.­60

cyclic existence

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃsāra AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A state of involuntary existence conditioned by afflicted mental states and the imprint of past actions, characterized by suffering in a cycle of life, death, and rebirth. On its reversal, the contrasting state of nirvāṇa is attained, free from suffering and the processes of rebirth.

Located in 35 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­37
  • 1.­39
  • 1.­91
  • 1.­126
  • 1.­134-135
  • 5.­15
  • 5.­18
  • 7.­73
  • 7.­104
  • 8.­3-4
  • 8.­57-58
  • 9.­15
  • 9.­173
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­53
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­60
  • 11.­74
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­96
  • 11.­131
  • 11.­152
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­191
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­203
  • g.­99
  • g.­117
  • g.­186
  • g.­187
  • g.­353
  • g.­355
g.­61

defilements

Wylie:
  • zag pa
Tibetan:
  • ཟག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “to flow” or “to ooze.” Mental defilements or contaminations that “flow out” toward the objects of cyclic existence, binding us to them. Vasubandhu offers two alternative explanations of this term: “They cause beings to remain (āsayanti) within saṃsāra” and “They flow from the Summit of Existence down to the Avīci hell, out of the six wounds that are the sense fields” (Abhidharma­kośa­bhāṣya 5.40; Pradhan 1967, p. 308). The Summit of Existence (bhavāgra, srid pa’i rtse mo) is the highest point within saṃsāra, while the hell called Avīci (mnar med) is the lowest; the six sense fields (āyatana, skye mched) here refer to the five sense faculties plus the mind, i.e., the six internal sense fields.

Located in 34 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­14
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­267-269
  • 4.­271-274
  • 4.­287-289
  • 4.­336
  • 4.­343
  • 4.­355
  • 5.­2
  • 6.­16
  • 7.­219
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­328
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­354
  • 10.­24
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­48
  • 11.­236
  • g.­112
  • g.­119
  • g.­315
  • g.­356
  • g.­380
g.­62

dependent origination

Wylie:
  • rten cing ’brel bar ’byung ba
Tibetan:
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་བར་འབྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratītya­samutpāda AS

The fact that all phenomena arise in dependence on causes and conditions, without which they cannot appear.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­153
  • 3.­18
  • 4.­355
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­48
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­115
  • 11.­130
  • 11.­132
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­164
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­183-186
  • 11.­195
g.­63

designation

Wylie:
  • gdags pa
  • btags pa
Tibetan:
  • གདགས་པ།
  • བཏགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prajñapti AS

To invest something with meaning.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­140-141
  • 1.­143-157
  • 1.­160
  • 4.­351
  • 9.­173
  • 11.­46
  • 11.­52
  • 11.­134
  • 11.­138
  • 11.­164
g.­65

dharma

Wylie:
  • chos
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term dharma conveys ten different meanings, according to Vasubandhu’s Vyākhyā­yukti. The primary meanings are as follows: the doctrine taught by the Buddha (Dharma); the ultimate reality underlying and expressed through the Buddha’s teaching (Dharma); the trainings that the Buddha’s teaching stipulates (dharmas); the various awakened qualities or attainments acquired through practicing and realizing the Buddha’s teaching (dharmas); qualities or aspects more generally, i.e., phenomena or phenomenal attributes (dharmas); and mental objects (dharmas).

Located in 358 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 1.­5
  • 1.­89
  • 1.­96
  • 1.­99
  • 1.­114
  • 1.­116-118
  • 1.­121-124
  • 1.­198
  • 1.­213
  • 2.­35
  • 2.­44
  • 2.­48-49
  • 2.­52
  • 2.­58
  • 2.­62
  • 2.­64
  • 2.­68
  • 2.­74
  • 2.­76
  • 3.­5
  • 3.­15
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­21-22
  • 3.­33
  • 4.­3-4
  • 4.­30
  • 4.­34
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­142-143
  • 4.­148
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­170
  • 4.­174
  • 4.­192
  • 4.­195-198
  • 4.­200
  • 4.­204-205
  • 4.­242
  • 4.­244
  • 4.­248
  • 4.­257
  • 4.­268-269
  • 4.­277
  • 4.­282-283
  • 4.­285
  • 4.­288-289
  • 4.­297
  • 4.­302-303
  • 4.­308-317
  • 4.­323-325
  • 4.­329
  • 4.­334-338
  • 4.­352
  • 4.­355
  • 4.­364
  • 4.­380-391
  • 4.­393
  • 4.­395
  • 4.­397
  • 4.­400
  • 4.­402
  • 4.­408
  • 4.­410
  • 4.­412
  • 4.­420
  • 5.­2-3
  • 5.­7
  • 5.­10-19
  • 5.­22-24
  • 6.­7-9
  • 6.­12
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­27-28
  • 7.­12
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­26
  • 7.­37
  • 7.­93
  • 7.­127
  • 7.­131
  • 7.­136
  • 7.­139-140
  • 7.­142
  • 7.­147
  • 7.­153-159
  • 7.­181-182
  • 7.­188
  • 7.­192-193
  • 7.­195
  • 7.­197
  • 7.­203
  • 7.­205
  • 7.­210-214
  • 7.­216
  • 7.­219
  • 7.­223
  • 7.­227
  • 7.­244
  • 7.­254
  • 7.­265
  • 7.­274-275
  • 7.­277
  • 7.­314
  • 7.­325
  • 7.­327
  • 7.­335
  • 7.­374
  • 8.­5-8
  • 8.­20
  • 9.­15
  • 9.­18
  • 9.­20
  • 9.­30-31
  • 9.­39
  • 9.­41
  • 9.­46
  • 9.­52-54
  • 9.­58-59
  • 9.­61
  • 9.­63
  • 9.­65
  • 9.­67-68
  • 9.­70-71
  • 9.­73-75
  • 9.­80
  • 9.­82
  • 9.­84
  • 9.­100
  • 9.­108
  • 9.­132-133
  • 9.­141-143
  • 9.­149
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­166-167
  • 9.­169-170
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­177-178
  • 9.­186
  • 9.­188-189
  • 9.­192-194
  • 9.­199
  • 9.­224
  • 9.­235
  • 9.­237-238
  • 9.­240
  • 9.­242
  • 9.­261
  • 9.­270
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­303
  • 9.­305-306
  • 9.­310-311
  • 9.­332
  • 9.­339
  • 9.­349
  • 9.­351
  • 9.­354-355
  • 9.­362
  • 9.­364
  • 9.­367
  • 9.­373
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­13
  • 10.­15-16
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­20-21
  • 10.­23-26
  • 10.­34-35
  • 10.­37
  • 10.­42-43
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­14-16
  • 11.­22
  • 11.­24
  • 11.­28
  • 11.­30
  • 11.­32-35
  • 11.­38
  • 11.­40
  • 11.­42
  • 11.­48-49
  • 11.­53
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­64
  • 11.­76
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­82-83
  • 11.­85
  • 11.­98-112
  • 11.­116
  • 11.­125
  • 11.­130-131
  • 11.­136
  • 11.­138-140
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­176
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­207
  • 11.­209-210
  • 11.­215
  • 11.­219
  • 11.­223
  • 11.­225-228
  • 11.­230
  • 11.­237
  • 11.­244
  • 11.­285
  • 11.­295
  • 11.­299
  • 11.­301-302
  • 11.­306
  • 11.­313-314
  • 11.­323-324
  • n.­33
  • n.­72
  • n.­117
  • n.­134
  • g.­66
  • g.­95
  • g.­121
  • g.­314
  • g.­375
g.­66

Dharma body

Wylie:
  • chos kyi sku
  • chos sku
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་སྐུ།
  • ཆོས་སྐུ།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmakāya AS

In distinction to the rūpakāya, or form body of a buddha, this is the eternal, imperceivable realization of a buddha. In origin it was a term for the presence of the Dharma and has become synonymous with the true nature.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­258
  • 9.­307
  • 9.­310-312
  • 9.­332-333
  • 9.­335
  • 9.­337-339
  • 9.­342
  • 10.­23
  • 11.­122
g.­69

Dīpaṅkara

Wylie:
  • mar me mdzad
Tibetan:
  • མར་མེ་མཛད།
Sanskrit:
  • dīpaṅkara AS

A previous buddha who gave Śākyamuni the prophecy of his buddhahood.

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­11
  • 9.­312
  • 11.­243
  • 11.­245-247
  • 11.­252
  • 11.­254-257
  • 11.­262-263
  • 11.­265
  • 11.­269-276
  • 11.­278-279
  • 11.­281-282
  • g.­70
  • g.­167
  • g.­216
  • g.­256
  • g.­278
g.­70

Dīpapati

Wylie:
  • mar me’i bdag po
Tibetan:
  • མར་མེའི་བདག་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • dīpapati AS
  • dīpavati AS

The brahmin attendant of King Jitaśatru who gave him half his kingdom. During the time of the Buddha Dīpaṅkara.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­244-246
  • 11.­252-255
  • n.­148
g.­72

divine hearing

Wylie:
  • lha’i rna ba
Tibetan:
  • ལྷའི་རྣ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • divyaśrotra AS

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­8
  • 9.­316
  • 10.­6
  • 10.­11-13
  • g.­103
  • g.­315
  • g.­339
g.­73

divine son

Wylie:
  • lha’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ལྷའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • devaputra AS

See “god.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­194
  • 9.­164
  • 11.­247
g.­75

eight kinds of mistakes

Wylie:
  • log pa brgyad
Tibetan:
  • ལོག་པ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭamithyātva AS

Wrong view, wrong intention, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong concentration.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­101
  • g.­77
g.­76

eight liberations

Wylie:
  • rnam par thar pa brgyad
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་ཐར་པ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭavimokṣa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A series of progressively more subtle states of meditative realization or attainment. There are several presentations of these found in the canonical literature. One of the most common is as follows: (1) One observes form while the mind dwells at the level of the form realm. (2) One observes forms externally while discerning formlessness internally. (3) One dwells in the direct experience of the body’s pleasant aspect. (4) One dwells in the realization of the sphere of infinite space by transcending all conceptions of matter, resistance, and diversity. (5) Transcending the sphere of infinite space, one dwells in the realization of the sphere of infinite consciousness. (6) Transcending the sphere of infinite consciousness, one dwells in the realization of the sphere of nothingness. (7) Transcending the sphere of nothingness, one dwells in the realization of the sphere of neither perception nor nonperception. (8) Transcending the sphere of neither perception nor nonperception, one dwells in the realization of the cessation of conception and feeling.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­228
  • 9.­164
  • g.­3
  • g.­4
  • g.­5
  • g.­6
  • g.­186
  • g.­187
g.­77

eight mistaken kinds of engagement

Wylie:
  • log par nges pa’i sbyor ba brgyad
Tibetan:
  • ལོག་པར་ངེས་པའི་སྦྱོར་བ་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭamithyātva­prayoga AS

See “eight kinds of mistakes.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­127
g.­80

eighteen unique buddha qualities

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas kyi chos ma ’dres pa bco brgyad rnams
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཆོས་མ་འདྲེས་པ་བཅོ་བརྒྱད་རྣམས།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭādaśāveṇikā­buddha­dharma AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Eighteen special features of a buddha’s behavior, realization, activity, and wisdom that are not shared by other beings. They are generally listed as: (1) he never makes a mistake, (2) he is never boisterous, (3) he never forgets, (4) his concentration never falters, (5) he has no notion of distinctness, (6) his equanimity is not due to lack of consideration, (7) his motivation never falters, (8) his endeavor never fails, (9) his mindfulness never falters, (10) he never abandons his concentration, (11) his insight (prajñā) never decreases, (12) his liberation never fails, (13) all his physical actions are preceded and followed by wisdom (jñāna), (14) all his verbal actions are preceded and followed by wisdom, (15) all his mental actions are preceded and followed by wisdom, (16) his wisdom and vision perceive the past without attachment or hindrance, (17) his wisdom and vision perceive the future without attachment or hindrance, and (18) his wisdom and vision perceive the present without attachment or hindrance.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­13
  • 4.­138
  • 4.­377-378
  • 4.­398
  • 4.­423
  • 6.­12
  • 11.­2
  • g.­81
  • g.­389
g.­81

eighteen unique, immeasurable buddha qualities

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas kyi chos ma ’dres pa bcwa brgyad yang dag par bslab pa sangs rgyas kyi chos tshad med pa
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཆོས་མ་འདྲེས་པ་བཅྭ་བརྒྱད་ཡང་དག་པར་བསླབ་པ་སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཆོས་ཚད་མེད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭādaśāveṇikā­parimāṇa­buddha­dharma AS

See “eighteen unique buddha qualities.”

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­3
g.­82

eightfold path

Wylie:
  • yan lag brgyad pa’i lam
  • yan lag brgyad ldan lam
  • lam yan lag brgyad pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད་པའི་ལམ།
  • ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད་ལྡན་ལམ།
  • ལམ་ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • aṣṭāṅga­mārga AS
  • aṣṭa­mārgāṅga AS

See “noble eightfold path.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­252
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­117
  • 11.­145
g.­83

eighth-lowest stage

Wylie:
  • brgyad pa
Tibetan:
  • བརྒྱད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A person who is “eight steps” away in the arc of their development from becoming an arhat (Tib. dgra bcom pa). Specifically, this term refers to one who is on the cusp of becoming a stream enterer (Skt. srotaāpanna; Tib. rgyun du zhugs pa), and it is the first and lowest stage in a list of eight stages or classes of a noble person (Skt. āryapudgala). The person at this lowest stage in the sequence is still on the path of seeing (Skt. darśanamārga; Tib. mthong lam) and then enters the path of cultivation (Skt. bhāvanāmārga; Tib. sgom lam) upon attaining the next stage, that of a stream enterer (stage seven). From there they progress through the remaining stages of the śrāvaka path, becoming in turn a once-returner (stages six and five), a non-returner (stages four and three), and an arhat (stages two and one). This same “eighth stage” also appears in a set of ten stages (Skt. daśabhūmi; Tib. sa bcu) found in Mahāyāna sources, where it is the third out of the ten. Not to be confused with the ten stages of the bodhisattva’s path, these ten stages mark the progress of one who sequentially follows the paths of a śrāvaka, pratyekabuddha, and then bodhisattva on their way to complete buddhahood. In this set of ten stages a person “on the eighth stage” is similarly one who is on the cusp of becoming a stream enterer.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­137
  • 11.­99
g.­84

eighty minor marks

Wylie:
  • dpe byad bzang po brgyad cu
Tibetan:
  • དཔེ་བྱད་བཟང་པོ་བརྒྱད་ཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • aśītyanuvyañjana AS

A set of eighty bodily characteristics and insignia borne by both buddhas and kings of the entire world (cakravartins). They are considered “minor” in terms of being secondary to the thirty-two characteristics of a great being.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8
  • 2.­51
  • 6.­8
  • g.­223
  • g.­367
g.­85

elder

Wylie:
  • gnas brtan
Tibetan:
  • གནས་བརྟན།
Sanskrit:
  • sthavira AS

A monk of seniority within the assembly of the śrāvakas.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­88
  • 4.­108
  • 4.­110-111
  • 4.­114-115
  • 4.­118
  • 7.­169
  • 7.­247-248
  • 11.­285
g.­86

elements

Wylie:
  • khams
Tibetan:
  • ཁམས།
Sanskrit:
  • dhātu AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In the context of Buddhist philosophy, one way to describe experience in terms of eighteen elements (eye, form, and eye consciousness; ear, sound, and ear consciousness; nose, smell, and nose consciousness; tongue, taste, and tongue consciousness; body, touch, and body consciousness; and mind, mental phenomena, and mind consciousness).

This also refers to the elements of the world, which can be enumerated as four, five, or six. The four elements are earth, water, fire, and air. A fifth, space, is often added, and the sixth is consciousness.

Located in 48 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8
  • 1.­150
  • 1.­163
  • 1.­166
  • 1.­200
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­50
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­172-175
  • 4.­179-181
  • 4.­183
  • 4.­191
  • 4.­353
  • 4.­355-356
  • 7.­28
  • 7.­31
  • 7.­348
  • 9.­334-335
  • 10.­28
  • 11.­56
  • 11.­59
  • 11.­61
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­74
  • 11.­89
  • 11.­101
  • 11.­117
  • 11.­122-123
  • 11.­127
  • 11.­130
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­166
  • 11.­176
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­219
  • 11.­283
  • n.­18
  • g.­238
  • g.­356
g.­87

eon

Wylie:
  • bskal pa
Tibetan:
  • བསྐལ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kalpa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A cosmic period of time, sometimes equivalent to the time when a world system appears, exists, and disappears. According to the traditional Abhidharma understanding of cyclical time, a great eon (mahākalpa) is divided into eighty lesser eons. In the course of one great eon, the universe takes form and later disappears. During the first twenty of the lesser eons, the universe is in the process of creation and expansion; during the next twenty it remains; during the third twenty, it is in the process of destruction; and during the last quarter of the cycle, it remains in a state of empty stasis. A fortunate, or good, eon (bhadrakalpa) refers to any eon in which more than one buddha appears.

Located in 78 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­53
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­30
  • 2.­39
  • 4.­10
  • 4.­19
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­98-99
  • 4.­101
  • 4.­104
  • 4.­115
  • 4.­242
  • 4.­247
  • 4.­250
  • 4.­260
  • 4.­390
  • 4.­396
  • 5.­2
  • 6.­15-16
  • 7.­73
  • 7.­104
  • 7.­106
  • 7.­109
  • 7.­123-125
  • 7.­148
  • 7.­270
  • 7.­290
  • 7.­297
  • 7.­302
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­324
  • 7.­327
  • 8.­13
  • 8.­20
  • 8.­24
  • 8.­36
  • 8.­42
  • 8.­45
  • 9.­48
  • 9.­66
  • 9.­76-77
  • 9.­89
  • 9.­102
  • 9.­117
  • 9.­164-165
  • 9.­170
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­218
  • 9.­256
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­310
  • 9.­312
  • 9.­354
  • 9.­373
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­24
  • 10.­31
  • 11.­236
  • 11.­243
  • 11.­266
  • 11.­275
  • 11.­277
  • 11.­282
  • 11.­287
  • 11.­289
  • 11.­299
  • 11.­309-313
g.­90

factors of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi yan lag
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཡན་ལག
Sanskrit:
  • bodhyaṅga AS

See “seven factors of awakening.”

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­313
  • 5.­21
  • 7.­157
  • 7.­254
  • 7.­374
  • 8.­56
  • 9.­173
  • 10.­23
  • 10.­26
  • 10.­45
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­56
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­136
g.­91

faculties

Wylie:
  • dbang po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • indriya AS

May refer to the sense faculties (sight, smell, touch, hearing, taste, and the mental faculty). May also refer to the “five faculties”: faith, vigor, mindfulness, concentration, and wisdom.

Located in 52 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­142
  • 3.­23
  • 3.­25
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­188-193
  • 4.­195-201
  • 4.­204
  • 4.­207
  • 4.­215
  • 4.­311
  • 4.­350
  • 4.­388-389
  • 5.­21
  • 7.­120
  • 7.­125-126
  • 7.­136
  • 7.­146
  • 7.­157
  • 9.­169
  • 9.­356
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­13
  • 10.­15-16
  • 10.­26
  • 10.­28
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­167-173
  • 11.­183
  • g.­314
g.­93

final nirvāṇa

Wylie:
  • yongs su mya ngan las ’das pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡོངས་སུ་མྱ་ངན་ལས་འདས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • parinirvāṇa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This refers to what occurs at the end of an arhat’s or a buddha’s life. When nirvāṇa is attained at awakening, whether as an arhat or buddha, all suffering, afflicted mental states (kleśa), and causal processes (karman) that lead to rebirth and suffering in cyclic existence have ceased, but due to previously accumulated karma, the aggregates of that life remain and must still exhaust themselves. It is only at the end of life that these cease, and since no new aggregates arise, the arhat or buddha is said to attain parinirvāṇa, meaning “complete” or “final” nirvāṇa. This is synonymous with the attainment of nirvāṇa without remainder (anupadhiśeṣanirvāṇa).

According to the Mahāyāna view of a single vehicle (ekayāna), the arhat’s parinirvāṇa at death, despite being so called, is not final. The arhat must still enter the bodhisattva path and reach buddhahood (see Unraveling the Intent, Toh 106, 7.14.) On the other hand, the parinirvāṇa of a buddha, ultimately speaking, should be understood as a display manifested for the benefit of beings; see The Teaching on the Extraordinary Transformation That Is the Miracle of Attaining the Buddha’s Powers (Toh 186), 1.32.

The term parinirvāṇa is also associated specifically with the passing away of the Buddha Śākyamuni, in Kuśinagara, in northern India.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 6.­16
  • 7.­219
  • 7.­293-295
  • 7.­321-322
  • 9.­8
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­167
  • 9.­304
  • 9.­355
  • 9.­373
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­44
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­312-313
  • g.­67
g.­94

five faculties

Wylie:
  • dbang po lnga
Tibetan:
  • དབང་པོ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcendriya AS

Faith, vigor, mindfulness, concentration, and wisdom. These are the same as the five powers but at a lesser stage of development. See also 11.­168.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­167
  • 11.­173
  • 11.­175
  • 11.­181
  • g.­91
  • g.­98
  • g.­365
g.­97

five perfections

Wylie:
  • pha rol tu phyin pa lnga
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་པ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcapāramitā AS

The practice of the bodhisatva, which consists of generosity (dāna), morality (śīla), patient acceptance (kṣānti), vigor (vīrya), meditation (dhyāna).

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­28
  • 11.­189
  • g.­261
g.­98

five powers

Wylie:
  • stobs lnga
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcabala AS

Faith, vigor, mindfulness, concentration, and wisdom. These are the same as the five faculties but at a greater stage of development. See also 11.­175.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­110
  • g.­94
  • g.­265
  • g.­365
g.­99

five realms

Wylie:
  • ’gro ba lnga
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་བ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcagati AS

These comprise gods and humans of the higher realms within cyclic existence, along with animals, anguished spirits, and the denizens of the hells, whose abodes are identified with the lower realms.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­56
  • 4.­152
  • 4.­158
  • g.­102
g.­100

five skandhas

Wylie:
  • phung po lnga
Tibetan:
  • ཕུང་པོ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcaskandha AS

Form, feeling, perception, mental conditioning, and consciousness. At the level of an individual person, the five skandhas refer to the basis upon which the mistaken idea of a self is projected. They are referred to as the “bases for appropriation” (Skt. upādāna) or the “five skandhas of grasping” insofar as all conceptual grasping arises based on these aggregates.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­195
  • 5.­18
  • 7.­339
  • 11.­68
  • 11.­127
  • g.­101
  • g.­317
g.­101

five skandhas of grasping

Wylie:
  • len pa’i phung po lnga
Tibetan:
  • ལེན་པའི་ཕུང་པོ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcopādāna­skandha AS

See “five skandhas.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­49
  • 11.­88
  • g.­100
g.­102

five states of existence

Wylie:
  • ’gro ba lnga
Tibetan:
  • འགྲོ་བ་ལྔ།
Sanskrit:
  • pañcagati AS

See “five realms.”

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­19
  • 8.­48
  • 10.­13
  • 11.­76
g.­104

foundations of magical abilities

Wylie:
  • rdzu ’phrul gyi rkang pa
Tibetan:
  • རྫུ་འཕྲུལ་གྱི་རྐང་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛddhipāda AS

The four foundations of magical abilities are learning, vigor, volition, and investigation. These are among the thirty-seven elements that are conducive to awakening.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­157
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­260
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­80
  • g.­365
g.­106

four continents

Wylie:
  • gling bzhi
Tibetan:
  • གླིང་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • cāturdvīpa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to traditional Buddhist cosmology, our universe consists of a central mountain, known as Mount Meru or Sumeru, surrounded by four island continents (dvīpa), one in each of the four cardinal directions. The Abhidharmakośa explains that each of these island continents has a specific shape and is flanked by two smaller subcontinents of similar shape. To the south of Mount Meru is Jambudvīpa, corresponding either to the Indian subcontinent itself or to the known world. It is triangular in shape, and at its center is the place where the buddhas attain awakening. The humans who inhabit Jambudvīpa have a lifespan of one hundred years. To the east is Videha, a semicircular continent inhabited by humans who have a lifespan of two hundred fifty years and are twice as tall as the humans who inhabit Jambudvīpa. To the north is Uttarakuru, a square continent whose inhabitants have a lifespan of a thousand years. To the west is Godānīya, circular in shape, where the lifespan is five hundred years.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­16
  • 6.­2
  • 6.­8
  • 8.­4
g.­108

four foundations of mindfulness

Wylie:
  • dran pa nye bar gzhag pa bzhi
Tibetan:
  • དྲན་པ་ཉེ་བར་གཞག་པ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catuḥ­smṛtyupasthāna AS

Using the body to cultivate mindfulness by observing the body, using feelings to cultivate mindfulness by observing feelings, using the mind to cultivate mindfulness by observing the mind, and using phenomena to cultivate mindfulness by observing phenomena. Part of the thirty-seven elements that are conducive to awakening.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­121
  • 11.­135
  • g.­222
  • g.­365
g.­111

four immeasurables

Wylie:
  • tshad med bzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturapramāṇa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The meditations on love (maitrī), compassion (karuṇā), joy (muditā), and equanimity (upekṣā), as well as the states of mind and qualities of being that result from their cultivation. They are also called the four abodes of Brahmā (caturbrahmavihāra).

In the Abhidharmakośa, Vasubandhu explains that they are called apramāṇa‍—meaning “infinite” or “limitless”‍—because they take limitless sentient beings as their object, and they generate limitless merit and results. Love is described as the wish that beings be happy, and it acts as an antidote to malice (vyāpāda). Compassion is described as the wish for beings to be free of suffering, and acts as an antidote to harmfulness (vihiṃsā). Joy refers to rejoicing in the happiness beings already have, and it acts as an antidote to dislike or aversion (arati) toward others’ success. Equanimity is considering all beings impartially, without distinctions, and it is the antidote to both attachment to pleasure and to malice (kāmarāgavyāpāda).

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­6
  • 11.­326
  • g.­158
g.­113

four kinds of perfect exertion

Wylie:
  • yang dag par spong ba bzhi
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པར་སྤོང་བ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catur­samyakprahāṇāni AS

Not giving rise to any negativity that has not yet arisen, abandoning those negativities that have arisen, actively giving rise to virtues that have not yet arisen, and causing those virtues that have arisen to increase. Part of the thirty-seven elements that are conducive to awakening.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­26
  • g.­365
g.­115

four meditative states

Wylie:
  • bsam gtan bzhi
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་གཏན་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • caturdhyāna AS

The four levels of meditative absorption of the beings of the form realms.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­292
  • 11.­179
g.­116

four methods for bringing people together

Wylie:
  • bsdu ba’i dngos po bzhi
Tibetan:
  • བསྡུ་བའི་དངོས་པོ་བཞི།
Sanskrit:
  • catuḥ­saṃgraha­vastu AS

Generosity, pleasant speech, conscientiousness, and egalitarianism. See F.191.b.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­7
  • i.­11
  • 11.­190
  • 11.­218
  • 11.­231
  • 11.­326
  • g.­220
g.­122

fully accomplished buddha

Wylie:
  • yang dag par rdzogs pa’i sangs rgyas
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པར་རྫོགས་པའི་སངས་རྒྱས།
Sanskrit:
  • samyaksam­buddha AS

An epithet of a buddha.

Located in 99 passages in the translation:

  • i.­11
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­5-6
  • 3.­1-2
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­47
  • 4.­62-63
  • 4.­65
  • 4.­67
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­97-99
  • 4.­108
  • 4.­112-113
  • 4.­116
  • 4.­140
  • 4.­145-146
  • 4.­149
  • 4.­171
  • 4.­282-284
  • 4.­388
  • 4.­423
  • 5.­2-3
  • 6.­13
  • 6.­15-16
  • 7.­174
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­218-219
  • 7.­221-222
  • 7.­290
  • 7.­292
  • 7.­322
  • 9.­6
  • 9.­20
  • 9.­66
  • 9.­77
  • 9.­79
  • 9.­112
  • 9.­114
  • 9.­133-134
  • 9.­144
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­166
  • 9.­177
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­203-204
  • 9.­231
  • 9.­243
  • 9.­257
  • 9.­274
  • 9.­282
  • 9.­284
  • 9.­286
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­312
  • 9.­354
  • 9.­356
  • 9.­362
  • 9.­369-370
  • 9.­372
  • 11.­99
  • 11.­196
  • 11.­233-236
  • 11.­241-242
  • 11.­252
  • 11.­256
  • 11.­262
  • 11.­273-275
  • 11.­277
  • 11.­281-282
  • 11.­296
  • 11.­309
  • 11.­311-312
g.­123

gandharva

Wylie:
  • dri za
Tibetan:
  • དྲི་ཟ།
Sanskrit:
  • gandharva AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of generally benevolent nonhuman beings who inhabit the skies, sometimes said to inhabit fantastic cities in the clouds, and more specifically to dwell on the eastern slopes of Mount Meru, where they are ruled by the Great King Dhṛtarāṣṭra. They are most renowned as celestial musicians who serve the gods. In the Abhidharma, the term is also used to refer to the mental body assumed by sentient beings during the intermediate state between death and rebirth. Gandharvas are said to live on fragrances (gandha) in the desire realm, hence the Tibetan translation dri za, meaning “scent eater.”

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­63
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­213
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­113
  • 9.­314
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­12
  • 11.­76
  • 11.­331
g.­124

Ganges

Wylie:
  • gang gA
Tibetan:
  • གང་གཱ།
Sanskrit:
  • gaṅgā AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gaṅgā, or Ganges in English, is considered to be the most sacred river of India, particularly within the Hindu tradition. It starts in the Himalayas, flows through the northern plains of India, bathing the holy city of Vārāṇasī, and meets the sea at the Bay of Bengal, in Bangladesh. In the sūtras, however, this river is mostly mentioned not for its sacredness but for its abundant sands‍—noticeable still today on its many sandy banks and at its delta‍—which serve as a common metaphor for infinitely large numbers.

According to Buddhist cosmology, as explained in the Abhidharmakośa, it is one of the four rivers that flow from Lake Anavatapta and cross the southern continent of Jambudvīpa‍—the known human world or more specifically the Indian subcontinent.

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­30
  • 2.­32
  • 4.­21
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­47
  • 4.­57
  • 4.­86
  • 4.­93
  • 4.­98
  • 4.­114
  • 4.­116
  • 4.­120
  • 4.­243
  • 4.­250
  • 4.­257
  • 4.­387
  • 5.­5
  • 6.­13
  • 7.­221
  • 7.­224
  • 8.­7-8
  • 8.­20
  • 9.­6
  • 11.­277
  • 11.­287
  • 11.­312
g.­125

garuḍa

Wylie:
  • nam mkha’ lding
Tibetan:
  • ནམ་མཁའ་ལྡིང་།
Sanskrit:
  • garuḍa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Indian mythology, the garuḍa is an eagle-like bird that is regarded as the king of all birds, normally depicted with a sharp, owl-like beak, often holding a snake, and with large and powerful wings. They are traditionally enemies of the nāgas. In the Vedas, they are said to have brought nectar from the heavens to earth. Garuḍa can also be used as a proper name for a king of such creatures.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­213
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­113
  • 10.­12
g.­127

generosity

Wylie:
  • sbyin pa
Tibetan:
  • སྦྱིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • dāna AS

The first of the six or ten perfections, often explained as the essential starting point and training for the practice of the others.

Located in 59 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­30
  • 2.­42
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­28
  • 4.­20-21
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­126
  • 4.­191
  • 4.­297
  • 4.­393
  • 5.­7
  • 5.­21
  • 5.­28
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­1-4
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­18
  • 6.­20-21
  • 6.­33-34
  • 7.­60
  • 7.­116
  • 7.­155
  • 7.­168
  • 7.­255
  • 7.­374
  • 10.­15-16
  • 10.­22
  • 10.­26
  • 10.­44
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­107
  • 11.­119
  • 11.­182
  • 11.­189
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­218-224
  • 11.­226
  • 11.­228-229
  • g.­97
  • g.­116
  • g.­261
  • g.­313
g.­128

god

Wylie:
  • lha
  • lha’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ལྷ།
  • ལྷའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • deva AS
  • devaputra AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In the most general sense the devas‍—the term is cognate with the English divine‍—are a class of celestial beings who frequently appear in Buddhist texts, often at the head of the assemblies of nonhuman beings who attend and celebrate the teachings of the Buddha Śākyamuni and other buddhas and bodhisattvas. In Buddhist cosmology the devas occupy the highest of the five or six “destinies” (gati) of saṃsāra among which beings take rebirth. The devas reside in the devalokas, “heavens” that traditionally number between twenty-six and twenty-eight and are divided between the desire realm (kāmadhātu), form realm (rūpadhātu), and formless realm (ārūpyadhātu). A being attains rebirth among the devas either through meritorious deeds (in the desire realm) or the attainment of subtle meditative states (in the form and formless realms). While rebirth among the devas is considered favorable, it is ultimately a transitory state from which beings will fall when the conditions that lead to rebirth there are exhausted. Thus, rebirth in the god realms is regarded as a diversion from the spiritual path.

Located in 148 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2-3
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­14
  • 1.­23
  • 1.­33
  • 1.­35
  • 1.­211
  • 2.­6-7
  • 2.­17
  • 2.­57
  • 2.­61
  • 2.­63-66
  • 2.­69-70
  • 2.­72
  • 2.­76
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­9
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­22
  • 4.­30
  • 4.­38
  • 4.­63
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­97
  • 4.­99
  • 4.­116
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­127
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­145
  • 4.­159
  • 4.­171
  • 4.­257
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­287
  • 4.­291
  • 4.­306
  • 4.­312
  • 4.­320
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­381
  • 4.­397
  • 4.­423
  • 5.­2
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­15
  • 7.­194
  • 7.­197
  • 7.­202-203
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­227
  • 7.­237
  • 7.­251
  • 7.­253
  • 7.­261
  • 7.­268
  • 7.­276
  • 7.­290
  • 7.­311
  • 7.­316
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­374-375
  • 8.­55
  • 8.­61
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­49
  • 9.­77
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­111
  • 9.­113
  • 9.­118
  • 9.­120
  • 9.­122
  • 9.­125
  • 9.­150
  • 9.­156
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­203
  • 9.­223
  • 9.­236
  • 9.­238
  • 9.­240
  • 9.­272
  • 9.­274
  • 9.­279
  • 9.­282
  • 9.­284
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­307
  • 9.­309
  • 9.­312
  • 9.­314
  • 9.­356
  • 9.­358
  • 9.­362-363
  • 9.­365
  • 9.­367-368
  • 10.­12
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­50
  • 11.­76
  • 11.­99
  • 11.­103
  • 11.­124
  • 11.­177
  • 11.­180
  • 11.­199
  • 11.­252
  • 11.­273
  • 11.­285
  • 11.­306
  • 11.­309
  • 11.­314
  • 11.­325
  • 11.­331
  • n.­41
  • n.­101
  • g.­38
  • g.­43
  • g.­44
  • g.­45
  • g.­73
  • g.­99
  • g.­135
  • g.­139
  • g.­140
  • g.­149
  • g.­151
  • g.­204
  • g.­242
  • g.­243
  • g.­337
  • g.­370
  • g.­392
  • g.­395
  • g.­412
g.­130

grasping

Wylie:
  • len pa
Tibetan:
  • ལེན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • upādāna AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This term, although commonly translated as “appropriation,” also means “grasping” or “clinging,” but it has a particular meaning as the ninth of the twelve links of dependent origination, situated between craving (tṛṣṇā, sred pa) and becoming or existence (bhava, srid pa). In some texts, four types of appropriation (upādāna) are listed: that of desire (rāga), view (dṛṣṭi), rules and observances as paramount (śīla­vrata­parāmarśa), and belief in a self (ātmavāda).

Located in 30 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­141
  • 1.­145-146
  • 1.­169
  • 1.­171
  • 1.­173
  • 1.­178
  • 1.­180-181
  • 3.­18
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­52
  • 4.­224
  • 4.­284
  • 4.­351
  • 4.­391
  • 5.­13
  • 7.­288
  • 7.­335
  • 7.­350
  • 11.­5-6
  • 11.­10
  • 11.­68
  • 11.­91
  • 11.­126
  • 11.­183
  • 11.­195
  • g.­100
  • g.­283
g.­131

great beings

Wylie:
  • sems dpa’ chen po
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་དཔའ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāsattva

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term can be understood to mean “great courageous one” or "great hero,” or (from the Sanskrit) simply “great being,” and is almost always found as an epithet of “bodhisattva.” The qualification “great” in this term, according to the majority of canonical definitions, focuses on the generic greatness common to all bodhisattvas, i.e., the greatness implicit in the bodhisattva vow itself in terms of outlook, aspiration, number of beings to be benefited, potential or eventual accomplishments, and so forth. In this sense the mahā- (“great”) is close in its connotations to the mahā- in “Mahāyāna.” While individual bodhisattvas described as mahāsattva may in many cases also be “great” in terms of their level of realization, this is largely coincidental, and in the canonical texts the epithet is not restricted to bodhisattvas at any particular point in their career. Indeed, in a few cases even bodhisattvas whose path has taken a wrong direction are still described as bodhisattva mahāsattva.

Later commentarial writings do nevertheless define the term‍—variably‍—in terms of bodhisattvas having attained a particular level (bhūmi) or realization. The most common qualifying criteria mentioned are attaining the path of seeing, attaining irreversibility (according to its various definitions), or attaining the seventh bhūmi.

Located in 33 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­2
  • 3.­16
  • 4.­68
  • 4.­254
  • 5.­7-8
  • 5.­21
  • 5.­24
  • 5.­27
  • 5.­30
  • 6.­33
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­219
  • 7.­375
  • 8.­61
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­174
  • 9.­176
  • 9.­180
  • 9.­194
  • 9.­198
  • 9.­303
  • 9.­348
  • 9.­351
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­11
  • 10.­14
  • 10.­23
  • 10.­29
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­217
  • 11.­231
  • 11.­241
g.­145

Heaven of Nothing Higher

Wylie:
  • ’og min
Tibetan:
  • འོག་མིན།
Sanskrit:
  • akaniṣṭha AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The eighth and highest level of the Realm of Form (rūpadhātu), the last of the five pure abodes (śuddhāvāsa); it is only accessible as the result of specific states of dhyāna. According to some texts this is where non-returners (anāgāmin) dwell in their last lives. In other texts it is the realm of the enjoyment body (saṃbhoga­kāya) and is a buddhafield associated with the Buddha Vairocana; it is accessible only to bodhisattvas on the tenth level.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­63
  • 4.­70-71
  • 11.­247
g.­154

Hīnayāna

Wylie:
  • theg pa chung ngu
Tibetan:
  • ཐེག་པ་ཆུང་ངུ།
Sanskrit:
  • hīnayāna AS

This is a collective term used by proponents of the Mahāyāna to refer to the Śrāvakayāna and the Pratyekabuddhayāna. The name stems from their goal‍—nirvāṇa and personal liberation‍—being seen as small or lesser than the goal of the Mahāyāna‍—buddhahood and the liberation of all sentient beings.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­292
g.­155

householder

Wylie:
  • khyim bdag
Tibetan:
  • ཁྱིམ་བདག
Sanskrit:
  • —

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term is usually used for wealthy lay patrons of the Buddhist community. It also refers to a subdivision of the vaiśya (mercantile) class of traditional Indian society, comprising businessmen, merchants, landowners, and so on.

Located in 93 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­4-5
  • 1.­7-8
  • 1.­10-11
  • 1.­37-38
  • 1.­41-42
  • 1.­48-49
  • 1.­53-54
  • 1.­61-62
  • 1.­69-70
  • 1.­75-76
  • 1.­83
  • 1.­91
  • 1.­101
  • 1.­113
  • 1.­124-141
  • 1.­157-166
  • 1.­168-171
  • 1.­197-200
  • 1.­208
  • 1.­215
  • 2.­1
  • 4.­30
  • 7.­210
  • 7.­292
  • 7.­309
  • 7.­335
  • 9.­38
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­176-180
  • 9.­195
  • 9.­199
  • 9.­202
  • 9.­304
  • 9.­336
  • 9.­366
  • 11.­257
  • 11.­285
  • g.­20
  • g.­172
  • g.­181
  • g.­284
  • g.­296
  • g.­297
  • g.­309
  • g.­345
g.­156

ignorance

Wylie:
  • ma rig pa
Tibetan:
  • མ་རིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • avidyā AS

The basic misapprehension that propels one to take rebirth in saṃsāra.

Located in 40 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­53
  • 1.­56
  • 1.­91
  • 1.­129
  • 1.­134
  • 1.­141
  • 1.­153-154
  • 1.­156
  • 1.­168-171
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­27
  • 4.­173
  • 4.­206
  • 4.­224
  • 4.­232
  • 4.­284
  • 4.­288
  • 4.­355
  • 4.­394
  • 5.­13
  • 5.­17
  • 7.­343
  • 8.­37
  • 9.­15
  • 11.­18
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­106
  • 11.­125
  • 11.­164
  • 11.­183-184
  • 11.­195
  • n.­19
  • g.­117
  • g.­376
g.­158

immeasurables

Wylie:
  • tshad med
Tibetan:
  • ཚད་མེད།
Sanskrit:
  • apramāṇa AS

See “four immeasurables.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­3
  • 11.­327
g.­162

insight meditation

Wylie:
  • lhag mthong
Tibetan:
  • ལྷག་མཐོང་།
Sanskrit:
  • vipaśyana AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An important form of Buddhist meditation focusing on developing insight into the nature of phenomena. Often presented as part of a pair of meditation techniques, the other being śamatha, “calm abiding”.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­225
  • 4.­236
  • 4.­308
  • 9.­173
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­48
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­155
  • 11.­157-161
  • g.­49
g.­163

Jain

Wylie:
  • gcer bu pa
Tibetan:
  • གཅེར་བུ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • nirgraṇṭha AS
  • nirgrantha AS

Indian religious tradition established by Mahāvīra (ca. sixth century ʙᴄᴇ).

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­187
  • 11.­200
g.­166

Jāmbūnada

Wylie:
  • ’dzam bu’i chu bo’i gser
Tibetan:
  • འཛམ་བུའི་ཆུ་བོའི་གསེར།
Sanskrit:
  • jāmbūnada AS

A royal capital in the distant past, during the time of the Buddha Ratnāṅga, ruled by the king Sudarśana.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­238
g.­167

Jitaśatru

Wylie:
  • dgra thul
Tibetan:
  • དགྲ་ཐུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • jitaśatru AS

A king in the past, during the time of the Buddha Dīpaṅkara.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­243-244
  • 11.­252-254
  • 11.­256-257
  • g.­70
  • g.­256
g.­170

karma

Wylie:
  • las
Tibetan:
  • ལས།
Sanskrit:
  • karma AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Meaning “action” in its most basic sense, karma is an important concept in Buddhist philosophy as the cumulative force of previous physical, verbal, and mental acts, which determines present experience and will determine future existences.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­163
  • 1.­188
  • 3.­15
  • 7.­334
  • 7.­362
  • 10.­8
  • g.­8
g.­171

karṣāpaṇa

Wylie:
  • kAr sha paNa
  • kA sha paNa
Tibetan:
  • ཀཱར་ཤ་པཎ།
  • ཀཱ་ཤ་པཎ།
Sanskrit:
  • karṣāpaṇa AS

A coin that varied in value according as to whether it was made of gold, silver, or copper.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­260
  • 11.­263
  • 11.­265
g.­173

Kimbhīra

Wylie:
  • ci ’jigs
Tibetan:
  • ཅི་འཇིགས།
Sanskrit:
  • kimbhīra AS

A yakṣa of Rājagṛha who interacts with the Buddha in chapter 2 of the Bodhisatva­piṭaka.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 2.­2-4
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­13
  • 2.­25
  • 2.­45-48
  • 2.­63
  • 2.­81
  • g.­287
g.­175

king of the entire world

Wylie:
  • ’khor los sgyur ba’i rgyal po
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་ལོས་སྒྱུར་བའི་རྒྱལ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • cakravarttirājya AS
  • cakravarttin AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An ideal monarch or emperor who, as the result of the merit accumulated in previous lifetimes, rules over a vast realm in accordance with the Dharma. Such a monarch is called a cakravartin because he bears a wheel (cakra) that rolls (vartate) across the earth, bringing all lands and kingdoms under his power. The cakravartin conquers his territory without causing harm, and his activity causes beings to enter the path of wholesome actions. According to Vasubandhu’s Abhidharmakośa, just as with the buddhas, only one cakravartin appears in a world system at any given time. They are likewise endowed with the thirty-two major marks of a great being (mahāpuruṣalakṣaṇa), but a cakravartin’s marks are outshined by those of a buddha. They possess seven precious objects: the wheel, the elephant, the horse, the wish-fulfilling gem, the queen, the general, and the minister. An illustrative passage about the cakravartin and his possessions can be found in The Play in Full (Toh 95), 3.3–3.13.

Vasubandhu lists four types of cakravartins: (1) the cakravartin with a golden wheel (suvarṇacakravartin) rules over four continents and is invited by lesser kings to be their ruler; (2) the cakravartin with a silver wheel (rūpyacakravartin) rules over three continents and his opponents submit to him as he approaches; (3) the cakravartin with a copper wheel (tāmracakravartin) rules over two continents and his opponents submit themselves after preparing for battle; and (4) the cakravartin with an iron wheel (ayaścakravartin) rules over one continent and his opponents submit themselves after brandishing weapons.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­16
  • 4.­137
  • 5.­9
  • 6.­12
  • 6.­16
  • 7.­199
  • 7.­210
  • 7.­227
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­274
  • 9.­285
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­20
  • 11.­199
  • 11.­311
  • 11.­325
  • g.­84
  • g.­309
  • g.­367
g.­176

kinnara

Wylie:
  • mi ’am ci
Tibetan:
  • མི་འམ་ཅི།
Sanskrit:
  • kinnara AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings that resemble humans to the degree that their very name‍—which means “is that human?”‍—suggests some confusion as to their divine status. Kinnaras are mythological beings found in both Buddhist and Brahmanical literature, where they are portrayed as creatures half human, half animal. They are often depicted as highly skilled celestial musicians.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­63
  • 4.­31
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­213
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­113
  • 10.­12
  • 11.­76
g.­178

knowledge

Wylie:
  • ye shes
Tibetan:
  • ཡེ་ཤེས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

Located in 238 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • 1.­73
  • 1.­182
  • 3.­11-13
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­22
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­9
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­14-15
  • 4.­44-55
  • 4.­58-59
  • 4.­61
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­99
  • 4.­105
  • 4.­124-125
  • 4.­131
  • 4.­138-139
  • 4.­142
  • 4.­144
  • 4.­146
  • 4.­148-149
  • 4.­158
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­174
  • 4.­184-185
  • 4.­189
  • 4.­211
  • 4.­226-227
  • 4.­229
  • 4.­231
  • 4.­242-243
  • 4.­251
  • 4.­256
  • 4.­258
  • 4.­267-269
  • 4.­271-272
  • 4.­274
  • 4.­277
  • 4.­282
  • 4.­287-288
  • 4.­291
  • 4.­305
  • 4.­315
  • 4.­317-318
  • 4.­334
  • 4.­352
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­366
  • 4.­380
  • 4.­382
  • 4.­384-386
  • 4.­388
  • 4.­390-397
  • 4.­416
  • 4.­418
  • 4.­421
  • 5.­21
  • 6.­8-9
  • 6.­18
  • 7.­113
  • 7.­118
  • 7.­134
  • 7.­136
  • 7.­159
  • 7.­203
  • 7.­210
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­217-218
  • 7.­220-223
  • 7.­240-242
  • 7.­308
  • 7.­344
  • 7.­374
  • 8.­6
  • 9.­5
  • 9.­15
  • 9.­30
  • 9.­140-141
  • 9.­170-171
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­198
  • 9.­228
  • 9.­233
  • 9.­255
  • 9.­270
  • 9.­320
  • 9.­335-336
  • 9.­350
  • 10.­6-24
  • 10.­26-27
  • 10.­34
  • 10.­37
  • 10.­43
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­13
  • 11.­29
  • 11.­33
  • 11.­35
  • 11.­48-49
  • 11.­55-56
  • 11.­68
  • 11.­70
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­74-76
  • 11.­79-80
  • 11.­82-83
  • 11.­87-93
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­104-120
  • 11.­125
  • 11.­128
  • 11.­130-131
  • 11.­133
  • 11.­137-139
  • 11.­142
  • 11.­147
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­176
  • 11.­180
  • 11.­191-193
  • 11.­195-197
  • 11.­209
  • 11.­211-212
  • 11.­216
  • 11.­222
  • 11.­224
  • 11.­277
  • 11.­287
  • 11.­296
  • 11.­330
  • n.­42
  • g.­103
  • g.­121
  • g.­315
  • g.­339
  • g.­380
g.­185

learned one

Wylie:
  • mkhas pa
Tibetan:
  • མཁས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • paṇḍita AS

Someone learned in the five major and five minor sciences.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­9
  • 3.­30
  • 7.­6
  • 7.­198
  • 7.­269
  • 8.­18
  • 9.­8
  • 9.­31-38
  • 9.­41-43
  • 11.­31
g.­186

liberation

Wylie:
  • rnam par grol ba
  • rnam par thar pa
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་གྲོལ་བ།
  • རྣམ་པར་ཐར་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vimukti AS
  • vimokṣa AS

Liberation from cyclic existence. See “three liberations” and “eight liberations.”

Located in 82 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­69
  • 1.­73
  • 1.­131
  • 1.­136-139
  • 1.­169
  • 1.­171
  • 1.­186
  • 1.­193
  • 2.­56
  • 3.­13
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­25
  • 3.­28
  • 3.­32
  • 4.­8
  • 4.­14-15
  • 4.­40
  • 4.­60
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­143
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­168
  • 4.­196
  • 4.­204-205
  • 4.­225
  • 4.­228
  • 4.­237-238
  • 4.­240
  • 4.­267
  • 4.­276
  • 4.­284
  • 4.­315
  • 4.­317
  • 4.­328-329
  • 4.­331-332
  • 4.­335-336
  • 4.­354
  • 4.­387
  • 4.­391
  • 4.­402
  • 4.­411-412
  • 5.­7
  • 5.­14
  • 6.­9
  • 7.­187
  • 7.­210
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­217
  • 7.­224
  • 7.­240-241
  • 7.­286
  • 9.­15
  • 9.­173
  • 10.­9-10
  • 10.­25
  • 10.­31
  • 11.­45
  • 11.­51
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­133
  • 11.­147
  • 11.­180
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­203
  • 11.­330
  • g.­119
  • g.­154
  • g.­354
g.­187

liberative meditative states, the attainments of concentration

Wylie:
  • bsam gtan dang / rnam par thar pa dang / ting nge ’dzin dang / snyoms par ’jug pa
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་གཏན་དང་། རྣམ་པར་ཐར་པ་དང་། ཏིང་ངེ་འཛིན་དང་། སྙོམས་པར་འཇུག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • dhyānavimokṣa­samādhi­samāpatti AS

In its most general sense, this term refers to the state of freedom from suffering and cyclic existence, or saṃsāra, that is the goal of the Buddhist path. More specifically, the term may refer to a category of advanced meditative attainment such as those of the “eight liberations.”

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­223
  • 4.­229
  • 4.­382
  • 5.­7
  • 6.­8
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­130
g.­188

life of purity

Wylie:
  • tshangs par spyod pa
Tibetan:
  • ཚངས་པར་སྤྱོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • brahmacārin AS

In Mahāyāna understood as pure conduct in the sense of compassion and so on; in other traditions understood as chastity.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 1.­5
  • 2.­29
  • 4.­267
  • 5.­2
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­325
  • 9.­145
  • 9.­151
  • 9.­177
  • 9.­251
  • 9.­256
  • 9.­278
  • 9.­281-283
  • 9.­371
  • 11.­150
  • 11.­278
g.­190

lord

Wylie:
  • bcom ldan ’das
Tibetan:
  • བཅོམ་ལྡན་འདས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhagavat AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Buddhist literature, this is an epithet applied to buddhas, most often to Śākyamuni. The Sanskrit term generally means “possessing fortune,” but in specifically Buddhist contexts it implies that a buddha is in possession of six auspicious qualities (bhaga) associated with complete awakening. The Tibetan term‍—where bcom is said to refer to “subduing” the four māras, ldan to “possessing” the great qualities of buddhahood, and ’das to “going beyond” saṃsāra and nirvāṇa‍—possibly reflects the commentarial tradition where the Sanskrit bhagavat is interpreted, in addition, as “one who destroys the four māras.” This is achieved either by reading bhagavat as bhagnavat (“one who broke”), or by tracing the word bhaga to the root √bhañj (“to break”).

Located in 210 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2-5
  • 1.­7-11
  • 1.­26
  • 1.­36-37
  • 1.­43
  • 1.­50
  • 1.­71
  • 1.­77
  • 1.­92
  • 1.­113
  • 1.­115
  • 1.­124-126
  • 1.­135-136
  • 1.­159
  • 1.­172
  • 1.­198
  • 1.­201
  • 1.­208
  • 2.­1-3
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­8
  • 2.­12
  • 2.­45-46
  • 2.­48
  • 2.­59
  • 2.­63
  • 2.­65
  • 2.­75-76
  • 2.­78-80
  • 3.­1-3
  • 3.­10-11
  • 3.­31
  • 4.­2
  • 4.­18
  • 4.­48-49
  • 4.­56
  • 4.­66
  • 4.­83-84
  • 4.­87-88
  • 4.­100
  • 4.­109-111
  • 4.­115
  • 4.­117
  • 4.­141
  • 4.­163
  • 4.­194
  • 4.­212
  • 4.­246
  • 4.­251
  • 4.­259
  • 4.­273
  • 4.­322
  • 4.­359
  • 4.­392
  • 4.­399
  • 5.­6
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­15-16
  • 6.­19
  • 7.­4
  • 7.­30
  • 7.­45
  • 7.­57
  • 7.­86
  • 7.­103
  • 7.­122
  • 7.­161
  • 7.­176
  • 7.­196
  • 7.­222-223
  • 7.­228
  • 7.­257
  • 7.­268
  • 7.­292-293
  • 7.­306
  • 7.­323
  • 7.­349
  • 8.­3
  • 8.­12
  • 8.­25
  • 9.­9
  • 9.­22
  • 9.­44
  • 9.­66
  • 9.­72
  • 9.­79
  • 9.­87
  • 9.­127
  • 9.­133-135
  • 9.­141
  • 9.­144
  • 9.­146
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­175
  • 9.­181
  • 9.­196
  • 9.­203-205
  • 9.­231
  • 9.­243
  • 9.­257
  • 9.­261
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­270
  • 9.­274
  • 9.­285-286
  • 9.­293
  • 9.­299-300
  • 9.­303-304
  • 9.­308
  • 9.­312
  • 9.­332-333
  • 9.­340
  • 9.­354-355
  • 9.­359-361
  • 9.­368-370
  • 9.­372-373
  • 10.­30
  • 11.­9
  • 11.­19
  • 11.­27
  • 11.­37
  • 11.­99
  • 11.­205
  • 11.­233-236
  • 11.­240-242
  • 11.­252-257
  • 11.­262
  • 11.­265
  • 11.­269-276
  • 11.­278-279
  • 11.­281
  • 11.­285-287
  • 11.­295-297
  • 11.­301-305
  • 11.­307-309
  • 11.­316
  • 11.­326
  • 11.­328
  • 11.­331
  • g.­114
g.­192

magical abilities

Wylie:
  • rdzu ’phrul
Tibetan:
  • རྫུ་འཕྲུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛddhi AS

Also rendered here as “magical powers.”

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • 2.­63
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­45
  • 4.­98
  • 4.­108
  • 4.­111-112
  • 4.­114
  • 4.­116
  • 4.­118
  • 4.­122
  • 7.­227
  • 7.­318
  • 9.­223
  • 9.­312
  • 9.­332
  • 10.­19-21
  • 10.­27
  • 10.­47
  • 11.­257
  • 11.­305
  • 11.­307
  • g.­104
  • g.­194
g.­193

magical powers

Wylie:
  • rdzu ’phrul
Tibetan:
  • རྫུ་འཕྲུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • ṛddhi AS

See “magical abilitites.”

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­76
  • 2.­79-80
  • 4.­104
  • 7.­199
  • g.­192
g.­198

Mahāskandha

Wylie:
  • phung po chen po
Tibetan:
  • ཕུང་པོ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahāskandha AS

A buddha in the distant past.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • i.­6
  • i.­11
  • 5.­2-3
  • 5.­31
  • 7.­219
  • 11.­233-236
  • g.­401
  • g.­402
  • g.­404
g.­201

Maheśvara

Wylie:
  • dbang phyug chen po
Tibetan:
  • དབང་ཕྱུག་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • maheśvara AS

An epithet of Śiva.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • 9.­164
  • n.­146
g.­202

mahoraga

Wylie:
  • lto ’phye chen po
Tibetan:
  • ལྟོ་འཕྱེ་ཆེན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • mahoraga AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally “great serpents,” mahoragas are supernatural beings depicted as large, subterranean beings with human torsos and heads and the lower bodies of serpents. Their movements are said to cause earthquakes, and they make up a class of subterranean geomantic spirits whose movement through the seasons and months of the year is deemed significant for construction projects.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­63
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­213
  • 9.­93
  • 10.­12
  • 11.­76
g.­203

Maitreya

Wylie:
  • byams pa
Tibetan:
  • བྱམས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • maitreya AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The bodhisattva Maitreya is an important figure in many Buddhist traditions, where he is unanimously regarded as the buddha of the future era. He is said to currently reside in the heaven of Tuṣita, as Śākyamuni’s regent, where he awaits the proper time to take his final rebirth and become the fifth buddha in the Fortunate Eon, reestablishing the Dharma in this world after the teachings of the current buddha have disappeared. Within the Mahāyāna sūtras, Maitreya is elevated to the same status as other central bodhisattvas such as Mañjuśrī and Avalokiteśvara, and his name appears frequently in sūtras, either as the Buddha’s interlocutor or as a teacher of the Dharma. Maitreya literally means “Loving One.” He is also known as Ajita, meaning “Invincible.”

For more information on Maitreya, see, for example, the introduction to Maitreya’s Setting Out (Toh 198).

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­20
  • 2.­27
  • 9.­30
  • 11.­312-313
g.­205

mandārava

Wylie:
  • man dA ra
  • man dA ra ba
Tibetan:
  • མན་དཱ་ར།
  • མན་དཱ་ར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • mandārava AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five trees of Indra’s paradise, its heavenly flowers often rain down in salutation of the buddhas and bodhisattvas and are said to be very bright and aromatic, gladdening the hearts of those who see them. In our world, it is a tree native to India, Erythrina indica or Erythrina variegata, commonly known as the Indian coral tree, mandarava tree, flame tree, and tiger’s claw. In the early spring, before its leaves grow, the tree is fully covered in large flowers, which are rich in nectar and attract many birds. Although the most widespread coral tree has red crimson flowers, the color of the blossoms is not usually mentioned in the sūtras themselves, and it may refer to some other kinds, like the rarer Erythrina indica alba, which boasts white flowers.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­6
  • 11.­273
  • 11.­306
g.­206

Mañjuśrī

Wylie:
  • ’jam pa’i dbyangs
Tibetan:
  • འཇམ་པའི་དབྱངས།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjuśrī AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Mañjuśrī is one of the “eight close sons of the Buddha” and a bodhisattva who embodies wisdom. He is a major figure in the Mahāyāna sūtras, appearing often as an interlocutor of the Buddha. In his most well-known iconographic form, he is portrayed bearing the sword of wisdom in his right hand and a volume of the Prajñā­pāramitā­sūtra in his left. To his name, Mañjuśrī, meaning “Gentle and Glorious One,” is often added the epithet Kumārabhūta, “having a youthful form.” He is also called Mañjughoṣa, Mañjusvara, and Pañcaśikha.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­1
  • n.­6
g.­207

Mañjusvara

Wylie:
  • dbyangs ’jam
Tibetan:
  • དབྱངས་འཇམ།
Sanskrit:
  • mañjusvara AS

The name of five hundred musician followers of the merchant Naradatta when they attain buddhahood in the distant future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­311
g.­208

Māra

Wylie:
  • bdud
Tibetan:
  • བདུད།
Sanskrit:
  • māra AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Māra, literally “death” or “maker of death,” is the name of the deva who tried to prevent the Buddha from achieving awakening, the name given to the class of beings he leads, and also an impersonal term for the destructive forces that keep beings imprisoned in saṃsāra:

(1) As a deva, Māra is said to be the principal deity in the Heaven of Making Use of Others’ Emanations (paranirmitavaśavartin), the highest paradise in the desire realm. He famously attempted to prevent the Buddha’s awakening under the Bodhi tree‍—see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.1‍—and later sought many times to thwart the Buddha’s activity. In the sūtras, he often also creates obstacles to the progress of śrāvakas and bodhisattvas. (2) The devas ruled over by Māra are collectively called mārakāyika or mārakāyikadevatā, the “deities of Māra’s family or class.” In general, these māras too do not wish any being to escape from saṃsāra, but can also change their ways and even end up developing faith in the Buddha, as exemplified by Sārthavāha; see The Play in Full (Toh 95), 21.14 and 21.43. (3) The term māra can also be understood as personifying four defects that prevent awakening, called (i) the divine māra (devaputra­māra), which is the distraction of pleasures; (ii) the māra of Death (mṛtyumāra), which is having one’s life interrupted; (iii) the māra of the aggregates (skandhamāra), which is identifying with the five aggregates; and (iv) the māra of the afflictions (kleśamāra), which is being under the sway of the negative emotions of desire, hatred, and ignorance.

Located in 70 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 1.­184
  • 2.­76
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­12
  • 3.­14
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­97
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­145
  • 4.­159
  • 4.­171
  • 4.­281
  • 4.­320
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­381
  • 4.­393
  • 4.­423
  • 5.­2
  • 5.­7
  • 5.­12
  • 7.­101
  • 7.­114
  • 7.­260
  • 7.­278
  • 7.­309
  • 7.­313
  • 7.­341
  • 7.­375
  • 8.­21-22
  • 8.­28
  • 8.­51-52
  • 8.­61
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­7
  • 9.­12
  • 9.­14-15
  • 9.­20-21
  • 9.­29
  • 9.­32
  • 9.­38-39
  • 9.­43
  • 9.­45
  • 9.­55
  • 9.­58
  • 9.­68
  • 9.­76
  • 9.­272
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­23-24
  • 10.­26
  • 10.­35
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­119
  • 11.­134
  • 11.­176
  • 11.­182
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­203
  • n.­97
  • n.­101
  • g.­89
  • g.­114
  • g.­294
g.­210

materialist

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten rgyang phan
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་རྒྱང་ཕན།
Sanskrit:
  • lokāyata AS

Followers of the materialist philosophy expounded by Cārvāka.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­187
  • 9.­42
  • 9.­71
  • 11.­106
  • 11.­258-259
g.­213

meditation

Wylie:
  • bsam gtan
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་གཏན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhyāna AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Dhyāna is defined as one-pointed abiding in an undistracted state of mind, free from afflicted mental states. Four states of dhyāna are identified as being conducive to birth within the form realm. In the context of the Mahāyāna, it is the fifth of the six perfections. It is commonly translated as “concentration,” “meditative concentration,” and so on.

Located in 55 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­12
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­28
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­81
  • 4.­191
  • 4.­208
  • 4.­217
  • 4.­239
  • 4.­383
  • 5.­21
  • 5.­28
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­117
  • 7.­129
  • 7.­168
  • 7.­255
  • 7.­335
  • 7.­344
  • 7.­374
  • 9.­173
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­5-6
  • 10.­10
  • 10.­15
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­22-23
  • 10.­25-29
  • 10.­31
  • 10.­48
  • 10.­51-52
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­114
  • 11.­119
  • 11.­156
  • 11.­179
  • 11.­182-183
  • 11.­189
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­228
  • g.­49
  • g.­97
  • g.­261
  • g.­313
g.­215

meditative state

Wylie:
  • bsam gtan
Tibetan:
  • བསམ་གཏན།
Sanskrit:
  • dhyāna AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Dhyāna is defined as one-pointed abiding in an undistracted state of mind, free from afflicted mental states. Four states of dhyāna are identified as being conducive to birth within the form realm. In the context of the Mahāyāna, it is the fifth of the six perfections. It is commonly translated as “concentration,” “meditative concentration,” and so on.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­124
  • 4.­227
  • 4.­240
  • 10.­1-5
  • 10.­27
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­156
  • 11.­179
  • g.­43
  • g.­44
  • g.­45
  • g.­135
  • g.­139
  • g.­140
  • g.­356
g.­216

Megha

Wylie:
  • sprin
Tibetan:
  • སྤྲིན།
Sanskrit:
  • megha AS

A young brahmin during the time of the Buddha Dīpaṅkara, he was past life of the Buddha Śākyamuni in which he received his prophecy of awakening.

Located in 19 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­11
  • 11.­259-261
  • 11.­263-265
  • 11.­269-276
  • 11.­278-279
  • g.­337
g.­217

mendicant

Wylie:
  • dge slong
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་།
Sanskrit:
  • bhikṣu AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term bhikṣu, often translated as “monk,” refers to the highest among the eight types of prātimokṣa vows that make one part of the Buddhist assembly. The Sanskrit term literally means “beggar” or “mendicant,” referring to the fact that Buddhist monks and nuns‍—like other ascetics of the time‍—subsisted on alms (bhikṣā) begged from the laity.

In the Tibetan tradition, which follows the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, a monk follows 253 rules as part of his moral discipline. A nun (bhikṣuṇī; dge slong ma) follows 364 rules. A novice monk (śrāmaṇera; dge tshul) or nun (śrāmaṇerikā; dge tshul ma) follows thirty-six rules of moral discipline (although in other vinaya traditions novices typically follow only ten).

In this text:

Also rendered here as “monk.”

Located in 73 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 1.­5
  • 1.­181
  • 1.­208-209
  • 1.­211
  • 2.­4-5
  • 2.­36
  • 2.­75
  • 4.­83
  • 4.­87
  • 4.­108-109
  • 4.­111
  • 4.­395
  • 6.­15
  • 7.­294
  • 7.­322
  • 8.­26
  • 9.­21
  • 9.­32-39
  • 9.­41-43
  • 9.­56
  • 9.­78-79
  • 9.­81
  • 9.­84
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­144-147
  • 9.­149-150
  • 9.­198-199
  • 9.­203
  • 9.­207
  • 9.­219
  • 9.­221
  • 9.­261
  • 9.­285
  • 9.­302
  • 9.­304
  • 9.­356-357
  • 9.­360
  • 9.­365
  • 9.­367
  • 9.­372
  • 11.­207
  • 11.­275
  • 11.­302
  • 11.­306
  • 11.­331
  • n.­23
  • g.­14
  • g.­169
  • g.­229
  • g.­239
  • g.­330
  • g.­334
  • g.­414
g.­218

mental conditioning

Wylie:
  • ’du byed
Tibetan:
  • འདུ་བྱེད།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃskāra AS

The reactive patterns of the mind.

Located in 32 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­138
  • 1.­141
  • 1.­152-153
  • 1.­156
  • 1.­164
  • 1.­166
  • 1.­198-200
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­20
  • 3.­26-27
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­224
  • 4.­232
  • 4.­350
  • 4.­353
  • 7.­288
  • 7.­339
  • 7.­344
  • 9.­344
  • 11.­49
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­57
  • 11.­88
  • 11.­183-184
  • 11.­283
  • g.­100
g.­220

methods for bringing people together

Wylie:
  • bsdu ba’i dngos po
Tibetan:
  • བསྡུ་བའི་དངོས་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃgrahavastu AS

See “four methods for bringing people together.”

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­4
  • 7.­253
  • 7.­374
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­190
  • 11.­218
  • 11.­231-232
g.­221

mind of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub sems
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་སེམས།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhicitta AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In the general Mahāyāna teachings the mind of awakening (bodhicitta) is the intention to attain the complete awakening of a perfect buddha for the sake of all beings. On the level of absolute truth, the mind of awakening is the realization of the awakened state itself.

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­4
  • 3.­10
  • 3.­12
  • 3.­14
  • 5.­8
  • 7.­79
  • 7.­106
  • 7.­154-159
  • 7.­205
  • 7.­211
  • 9.­154
  • 9.­167
  • 9.­172
  • 10.­18
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­110
  • 11.­129
  • 11.­199-200
  • 11.­229
  • 11.­287
  • 11.­289
g.­222

mindfulness

Wylie:
  • dran pa
Tibetan:
  • དྲན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • smṛti AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This is the faculty that enables the mind to maintain its attention on a referent object, counteracting the arising of forgetfulness, which is a great obstacle to meditative stability. The root smṛ may mean “to recollect” but also simply “to think of.” Broadly speaking, smṛti, commonly translated as “mindfulness,” means to bring something to mind, not necessarily something experienced in a distant past but also something that is experienced in the present, such as the position of one’s body or the breath.

Together with alertness (samprajāna, shes bzhin), it is one of the two indispensable factors for the development of calm abiding (śamatha, zhi gnas).

In this text:

See also “four foundations of mindfulness.”

Located in 58 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­69
  • 1.­73
  • 1.­131
  • 4.­189
  • 4.­199
  • 4.­299
  • 4.­310-311
  • 4.­313-314
  • 5.­21
  • 7.­157
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­365-367
  • 10.­3-4
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­16
  • 10.­23
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­33-34
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­110
  • 11.­121-122
  • 11.­124-125
  • 11.­128-134
  • 11.­136-137
  • 11.­145
  • 11.­152
  • 11.­167
  • 11.­170-171
  • 11.­175
  • 11.­178
  • 11.­201
  • 11.­209
  • g.­75
  • g.­91
  • g.­94
  • g.­98
  • g.­108
  • g.­248
  • g.­354
g.­224

miracle

Wylie:
  • cho ’phrul
Tibetan:
  • ཆོ་འཕྲུལ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratihārya AS

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­36
  • 2.­53
  • 11.­305
g.­229

monk

Wylie:
  • dge slong
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་།
Sanskrit:
  • bhikṣu AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term bhikṣu, often translated as “monk,” refers to the highest among the eight types of prātimokṣa vows that make one part of the Buddhist assembly. The Sanskrit term literally means “beggar” or “mendicant,” referring to the fact that Buddhist monks and nuns‍—like other ascetics of the time‍—subsisted on alms (bhikṣā) begged from the laity.

In the Tibetan tradition, which follows the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, a monk follows 253 rules as part of his moral discipline. A nun (bhikṣuṇī; dge slong ma) follows 364 rules. A novice monk (śrāmaṇera; dge tshul) or nun (śrāmaṇerikā; dge tshul ma) follows thirty-six rules of moral discipline (although in other vinaya traditions novices typically follow only ten).

In this text:

Also rendered here as “mendicant.”

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 1.­8
  • 1.­13
  • 1.­52
  • 4.­30
  • 7.­214
  • 9.­30
  • 9.­177
  • 9.­185
  • n.­12
  • g.­85
  • g.­105
  • g.­217
g.­230

morality

Wylie:
  • tshul khrims
Tibetan:
  • ཚུལ་ཁྲིམས།
Sanskrit:
  • śīla AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Morally virtuous or disciplined conduct and the abandonment of morally undisciplined conduct of body, speech, and mind. In a general sense, moral discipline is the cause for rebirth in higher, more favorable states, but it is also foundational to Buddhist practice as one of the three trainings (triśikṣā) and one of the six perfections of a bodhisattva. Often rendered as “ethics,” “discipline,” and “morality.”

Located in 126 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • i.­12
  • 1.­183
  • 1.­185
  • 2.­30
  • 2.­42
  • 3.­12-13
  • 3.­16-17
  • 3.­28
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­14-15
  • 4.­22
  • 4.­30
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­64
  • 4.­80-83
  • 4.­85-86
  • 4.­101-102
  • 4.­104
  • 4.­106
  • 4.­191
  • 4.­237
  • 4.­312
  • 4.­317
  • 4.­355
  • 4.­384-385
  • 4.­393
  • 5.­7
  • 5.­21
  • 5.­28
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­1
  • 6.­4
  • 6.­7
  • 6.­9
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­3
  • 7.­6
  • 7.­8-16
  • 7.­19-20
  • 7.­101
  • 7.­168
  • 7.­174
  • 7.­179
  • 7.­188
  • 7.­204
  • 7.­210
  • 7.­212-213
  • 7.­217
  • 7.­250-256
  • 7.­258
  • 7.­262
  • 7.­264
  • 7.­274
  • 7.­276
  • 7.­278
  • 7.­282
  • 7.­285
  • 7.­332-333
  • 7.­335
  • 7.­340
  • 7.­372-376
  • 8.­24
  • 9.­5
  • 9.­8
  • 9.­13
  • 9.­15
  • 9.­30
  • 9.­91
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­177
  • 9.­185
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­15-16
  • 10.­22
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­102-103
  • 11.­119
  • 11.­130
  • 11.­147
  • 11.­163
  • 11.­182
  • 11.­189
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­228
  • 11.­322
  • g.­97
  • g.­261
  • g.­307
  • g.­313
g.­232

Mount Himavat

Wylie:
  • kha ba can
  • gangs ri
Tibetan:
  • ཁ་བ་ཅན།
  • གངས་རི།
Sanskrit:
  • himavat AS

Name of mountain; one of ten kings of mountains.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­76
  • 4.­68
  • 9.­350
  • 11.­258
  • g.­398
g.­235

Mount Meru

Wylie:
  • ri rab
  • lhun po
Tibetan:
  • རི་རབ།
  • ལྷུན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • meru AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

According to ancient Buddhist cosmology, this is the great mountain forming the axis of the universe. At its summit is Sudarśana, home of Śakra and his thirty-two gods, and on its flanks live the asuras. The mount has four sides facing the cardinal directions, each of which is made of a different precious stone. Surrounding it are several mountain ranges and the great ocean where the four principal island continents lie: in the south, Jambudvīpa (our world); in the west, Godānīya; in the north, Uttarakuru; and in the east, Pūrvavideha. Above it are the abodes of the desire realm gods. It is variously referred to as Meru, Mount Meru, Sumeru, and Mount Sumeru.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­14
  • 9.­5
  • 9.­326
  • 10.­34
  • 10.­37
  • 10.­39
  • 11.­290
  • g.­151
  • g.­335
g.­237

nāga

Wylie:
  • klu
Tibetan:
  • ཀླུ།
Sanskrit:
  • nāga AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who live in subterranean aquatic environments, where they guard wealth and sometimes also teachings. Nāgas are associated with serpents and have a snakelike appearance. In Buddhist art and in written accounts, they are regularly portrayed as half human and half snake, and they are also said to have the ability to change into human form. Some nāgas are Dharma protectors, but they can also bring retribution if they are disturbed. They may likewise fight one another, wage war, and destroy the lands of others by causing lightning, hail, and flooding.

Located in 25 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­57
  • 2.­61
  • 2.­69
  • 2.­72
  • 3.­9
  • 7.­202
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­237
  • 7.­261
  • 7.­311
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­113
  • 9.­156
  • 9.­223
  • 9.­240
  • 9.­314
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­12
  • 10.­38
  • 11.­76
  • g.­370
g.­238

name and form

Wylie:
  • ming dang gzugs
Tibetan:
  • མིང་དང་གཟུགས།
Sanskrit:
  • nāmarūpa AS

The psychophysical elements of a sentient being.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­141
  • 1.­150-151
  • 3.­18
  • 4.­224
  • 11.­183
g.­240

Naradatta

Wylie:
  • mis byin
Tibetan:
  • མིས་བྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • naradatta AS

A merchant in the assembly of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 17 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­285-286
  • 11.­288
  • 11.­295-297
  • 11.­301-303
  • 11.­305-307
  • 11.­309-311
  • g.­207
  • g.­293
g.­243

nine abodes of sentient beings

Wylie:
  • sems can gyi gnas dgu
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་ཅན་གྱི་གནས་དགུ
Sanskrit:
  • navasatvāvāsa AS

The dung dkar tshig mdzod chen mo lists the nine as (1) among those with different (tha dad) bodies and perceptions, such as humans and some gods, (2) among those with different bodies and a single perception, such as the Brahmakāyika gods, (3) among those with a single body and different perceptions, such as the Ābhāsvara gods, (4) among those with a single body and a single perception, such as the Śubhakṛtsna gods, and (5) among beings in Asaṃjñisattva, (6) in the abode of limitless space, (7) in the abode of limitless consciousness, (8) in the abode of nothing whatsoever, and (9) in the abode of neither perception nor nonperception.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­127
g.­247

nirvāṇa

Wylie:
  • mya ngan las ’das pa
  • mya ngan ’das
Tibetan:
  • མྱ་ངན་ལས་འདས་པ།
  • མྱ་ངན་འདས།
Sanskrit:
  • nirvāṇa AS
  • nirvṛti AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

In Sanskrit, the term nirvāṇa literally means “extinguishment” and the Tibetan mya ngan las ’das pa literally means “gone beyond sorrow.” As a general term, it refers to the cessation of all suffering, afflicted mental states (kleśa), and causal processes (karman) that lead to rebirth and suffering in cyclic existence, as well as to the state in which all such rebirth and suffering has permanently ceased.

More specifically, three main types of nirvāṇa are identified. (1) The first type of nirvāṇa, called nirvāṇa with remainder (sopadhiśeṣanirvāṇa), is the state in which arhats or buddhas have attained awakening but are still dependent on the conditioned aggregates until their lifespan is exhausted. (2) At the end of life, given that there are no more causes for rebirth, these aggregates cease and no new aggregates arise. What occurs then is called nirvāṇa without remainder ( anupadhiśeṣanirvāṇa), which refers to the unconditioned element (dhātu) of nirvāṇa in which there is no remainder of the aggregates. (3) The Mahāyāna teachings distinguish the final nirvāṇa of buddhas from that of arhats, the nirvāṇa of arhats not being considered ultimate. The buddhas attain what is called nonabiding nirvāṇa (apratiṣṭhitanirvāṇa), which transcends the extremes of saṃsāra and nirvāṇa, i.e., existence and peace. This is the nirvāṇa that is the goal of the Mahāyāna path.

Located in 89 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­90
  • 1.­140
  • 1.­157
  • 1.­160
  • 1.­167-171
  • 3.­28
  • 3.­31-32
  • 4.­38
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­99
  • 4.­103
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­173
  • 4.­184
  • 4.­257
  • 4.­263
  • 4.­268
  • 4.­284
  • 4.­315
  • 4.­325
  • 4.­348
  • 4.­357
  • 4.­389
  • 5.­7
  • 5.­15
  • 5.­19
  • 6.­10
  • 6.­14
  • 6.­16
  • 6.­31
  • 7.­136
  • 7.­139
  • 7.­147
  • 7.­229
  • 7.­286-287
  • 7.­294
  • 7.­302
  • 7.­305
  • 7.­325
  • 7.­329-331
  • 7.­335
  • 7.­340
  • 8.­19
  • 8.­23
  • 8.­35
  • 8.­55
  • 8.­57-58
  • 9.­7-8
  • 9.­14
  • 9.­58
  • 9.­67-68
  • 9.­171
  • 9.­332
  • 9.­334
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­22
  • 11.­24
  • 11.­38
  • 11.­40
  • 11.­48
  • 11.­53
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­60
  • 11.­74
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­96
  • 11.­146
  • 11.­151-152
  • 11.­183
  • 11.­203
  • 11.­315
  • 11.­318-319
  • 11.­321
  • 11.­325
  • 11.­329
  • g.­154
g.­248

noble eightfold path

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa’i lam yan lag brgyad
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པའི་ལམ་ཡན་ལག་བརྒྱད།
Sanskrit:
  • āryāṣṭāṅga­mārga AS

Right view, right intention, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right concentration. See also 11.­145.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­314
  • g.­82
  • g.­250
  • g.­365
g.­249

noble one

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa
  • ’phags
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པ།
  • འཕགས།
Sanskrit:
  • ārya AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit ārya has the general meaning of a noble person, one of a higher class or caste. In Buddhist literature, depending on the context, it often means specifically one who has gained the realization of the path and is superior for that reason. In particular, it applies to stream enterers, once-returners, non-returners, and worthy ones (arhats) and is also used as an epithet of bodhisattvas. In the five-path system, it refers to someone who has achieved at least the path of seeing (darśanamārga).

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­15
  • 4.­256
  • 4.­283
  • 4.­288
  • 4.­345
  • 4.­365
  • 7.­16
  • 7.­22
  • 7.­253
  • 7.­340
  • 7.­374
  • 9.­292
  • 10.­3
  • 10.­8
  • 10.­10
  • 10.­12-13
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­36
  • 11.­64
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­132
  • 11.­150
  • 11.­182
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­210
g.­250

noble path

Wylie:
  • ’phags pa’i lam
Tibetan:
  • འཕགས་པའི་ལམ།
Sanskrit:
  • āryapatha AS
  • āryamārga AS

See “noble eightfold path.”

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8
  • 1.­202
  • 4.­136
  • 5.­7
  • 7.­70
  • 7.­335
  • 9.­8
  • 9.­15
  • 9.­130
  • 10.­9
  • 11.­41
  • 11.­143
  • 11.­151-152
g.­251

non-returner

Wylie:
  • phyir mi ’ong ba
Tibetan:
  • ཕྱིར་མི་འོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • anāgamin AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The third of the four attainments of śrāvakas, this term refers to a person who will no longer take rebirth in the desire realm (kāmadhātu), but either be reborn in the Pure Abodes (śuddhāvāsa) or reach the state of an arhat in their current lifetime. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­137
  • 9.­170
  • 9.­304
  • 11.­99
g.­252

nonhuman

Wylie:
  • mi ma yin
Tibetan:
  • མི་མ་ཡིན།
Sanskrit:
  • amanuṣya AS

A spirit.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­63
  • 3.­9
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­213
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­113
  • 9.­314
  • 10.­12
  • 11.­76
  • 11.­295
  • n.­21
g.­253

nun

Wylie:
  • dge slong ma
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་སློང་མ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhikṣuṇī AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term bhikṣuṇī, often translated as “nun,” refers to the highest among the eight types of prātimokṣa vows that make one part of the Buddhist assembly. The Sanskrit term bhikṣu (to which the female grammatical ending ṇī is added) literally means “beggar” or “mendicant,” referring to the fact that Buddhist nuns and monks‍—like other ascetics of the time‍—subsisted on alms (bhikṣā) begged from the laity. In the Tibetan tradition, which follows the Mūlasarvāstivāda Vinaya, a bhikṣuṇī follows 364 rules and a bhikṣu follows 253 rules as part of their moral discipline.

For the first few years of the Buddha’s teachings in India, there was no ordination for women. It started at the persistent request and display of determination of Mahāprajāpatī, the Buddha’s stepmother and aunt, together with five hundred former wives of men of Kapilavastu, who had themselves become monks. Mahāprajāpatī is thus considered to be the founder of the nun’s order.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­2
  • 4.­30
  • 9.­30
  • 9.­177
  • 9.­185
  • g.­105
g.­254

once-returner

Wylie:
  • lan cig phyir ’ong ba
Tibetan:
  • ལན་ཅིག་ཕྱིར་འོང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sakṛdāgāmin AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One who has achieved the second of the four levels of attainment on the śrāvaka path and who will attain liberation after only one more birth. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­137
  • 9.­170
  • 9.­304
  • 11.­99
g.­256

Padmāvatī

Wylie:
  • pad ma can
Tibetan:
  • པད་མ་ཅན།
Sanskrit:
  • padmāvatī AS

The capital city of King Jitaśatru during the time of the Buddha Dīpaṅkara.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­243
  • 11.­256-257
  • 11.­261-262
g.­258

patient acceptance

Wylie:
  • bzod pa
Tibetan:
  • བཟོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • kṣānti AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A term meaning acceptance, forbearance, or patience. As the third of the six perfections, patience is classified into three kinds: the capacity to tolerate abuse from sentient beings, to tolerate the hardships of the path to buddhahood, and to tolerate the profound nature of reality. As a term referring to a bodhisattva’s realization, dharmakṣānti (chos la bzod pa) can refer to the ways one becomes “receptive” to the nature of Dharma, and it can be an abbreviation of anutpattikadharmakṣānti, “forbearance for the unborn nature, or nonproduction, of dharmas.”

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­22
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­101
  • 4.­128
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­191
  • 5.­7-8
  • 5.­21
  • 5.­28
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­116
  • 7.­374
  • 8.­1
  • 8.­20
  • 8.­54-55
  • 8.­57-59
  • 8.­61-62
  • 10.­15-16
  • 10.­22
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­112
  • 11.­119
  • 11.­182
  • 11.­189
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­228
  • 11.­283
  • g.­97
  • g.­261
  • g.­313
g.­261

perfection

Wylie:
  • pha rol tu phyin pa
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pāramitā AS

The trainings of the bodhisatva path. The five perfections are generosity (dāna), morality (śīla), patient acceptance (kṣānti), vigor (vīrya), meditation (dhyāna). When listed as six, wisdom (prajñā) is included.

Located in 72 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 4.­21-22
  • 4.­65
  • 4.­67
  • 4.­81-83
  • 4.­85-87
  • 4.­98
  • 4.­112-114
  • 4.­161
  • 5.­4
  • 5.­23
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­1-2
  • 6.­33-34
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­116-117
  • 7.­155
  • 7.­301
  • 7.­344
  • 7.­374-376
  • 8.­1
  • 8.­62
  • 9.­1
  • 9.­301
  • 9.­305-306
  • 9.­333
  • 9.­339
  • 9.­349
  • 9.­352-353
  • 9.­362
  • 9.­374-376
  • 10.­1
  • 10.­6
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­22-23
  • 10.­28-29
  • 10.­48
  • 10.­51-52
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­117
  • 11.­153
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­182
  • 11.­189
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­197-198
  • 11.­228
  • 11.­232
  • 11.­327
  • g.­112
  • g.­127
g.­262

perfection of wisdom

Wylie:
  • shes rab kyi pha rol tu phyin pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་རབ་ཀྱི་ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • prajñā­pāramitā

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The sixth of the six perfections, it refers to the profound understanding of the emptiness of all phenomena, the realization of ultimate reality. It is often personified as a female deity, worshiped as the “Mother of All Buddhas” (sarva­jina­mātā).

Located in 43 passages in the translation:

  • i.­10
  • 4.­65
  • 4.­67
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­374
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­3-4
  • 11.­17-18
  • 11.­25-26
  • 11.­35-36
  • 11.­47-48
  • 11.­52-56
  • 11.­58
  • 11.­61
  • 11.­70
  • 11.­81
  • 11.­86-87
  • 11.­101
  • 11.­120
  • 11.­135
  • 11.­144
  • 11.­161
  • 11.­166
  • 11.­174
  • 11.­181-182
  • 11.­186
  • 11.­189
  • 11.­193-194
  • 11.­217
  • 11.­228
g.­263

phenomenon

Wylie:
  • chos
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the meanings of the Skt. term dharma. This applies to “phenomena” or “things” in general, and, more specifically, “mental phenomena” which are the object of the mental faculty (manas, yid).

Located in 190 passages in the translation:

  • i.­8
  • i.­11
  • 1.­61-62
  • 1.­130
  • 1.­140
  • 1.­153
  • 1.­157
  • 1.­160-161
  • 1.­164
  • 1.­169
  • 1.­171
  • 1.­176-177
  • 1.­190-193
  • 1.­196-197
  • 1.­200
  • 1.­205
  • 1.­207
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­19-20
  • 3.­23
  • 3.­31-32
  • 4.­12
  • 4.­15-16
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­44
  • 4.­51
  • 4.­53
  • 4.­99
  • 4.­173
  • 4.­237
  • 4.­249
  • 4.­268
  • 4.­274-276
  • 4.­284-285
  • 4.­288
  • 4.­292-302
  • 4.­310
  • 4.­313
  • 4.­318
  • 4.­342
  • 4.­344-345
  • 4.­347
  • 4.­349-355
  • 4.­357
  • 4.­364
  • 4.­375
  • 4.­382
  • 4.­384
  • 4.­389-390
  • 4.­394-395
  • 4.­397
  • 4.­409
  • 4.­418
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­27
  • 5.­29
  • 7.­3
  • 7.­16
  • 7.­185-186
  • 7.­218
  • 7.­256
  • 7.­287
  • 7.­344
  • 7.­351
  • 7.­366-372
  • 8.­57
  • 9.­82-83
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­333
  • 9.­339
  • 9.­342-343
  • 10.­10
  • 10.­13
  • 10.­16
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­22-26
  • 10.­33
  • 10.­49
  • 11.­3-8
  • 11.­10-13
  • 11.­18
  • 11.­26
  • 11.­36
  • 11.­44-48
  • 11.­51-53
  • 11.­55-56
  • 11.­59-61
  • 11.­64
  • 11.­71-75
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­92
  • 11.­101
  • 11.­121
  • 11.­126
  • 11.­130
  • 11.­132-134
  • 11.­137
  • 11.­142-143
  • 11.­153
  • 11.­157-158
  • 11.­164
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­183
  • 11.­185
  • 11.­187
  • 11.­193
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­203
  • 11.­224
  • 11.­282-283
  • n.­134
  • g.­16
  • g.­62
  • g.­108
  • g.­112
  • g.­262
  • g.­283
g.­265

powers

Wylie:
  • stobs
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • bala AS

See “five powers.”

Located in 28 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­15
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­280
  • 5.­21
  • 6.­15-16
  • 7.­136
  • 7.­157
  • 7.­159
  • 7.­223
  • 8.­55
  • 9.­14
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­170
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­312
  • 9.­332
  • 9.­338
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­39
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­34
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­257
  • g.­339
g.­267

pratyekabuddha

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas
  • rang rgyal
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས།
  • རང་རྒྱལ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyekabuddha AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Literally, “buddha for oneself” or “solitary realizer.” Someone who, in his or her last life, attains awakening entirely through their own contemplation, without relying on a teacher. Unlike the awakening of a fully realized buddha (samyaksambuddha), the accomplishment of a pratyeka­buddha is not regarded as final or ultimate. They attain realization of the nature of dependent origination, the selflessness of the person, and a partial realization of the selflessness of phenomena, by observing the suchness of all that arises through interdependence. This is the result of progress in previous lives but, unlike a buddha, they do not have the necessary merit, compassion or motivation to teach others. They are named as “rhinoceros-like” (khaḍgaviṣāṇakalpa) for their preference for staying in solitude or as “congregators” (vargacārin) when their preference is to stay among peers.

Located in 39 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­48
  • 4.­147
  • 4.­155
  • 4.­229
  • 4.­239
  • 4.­244
  • 4.­257
  • 4.­283
  • 4.­391
  • 4.­396-397
  • 4.­411
  • 6.­6
  • 7.­120
  • 7.­220
  • 7.­344
  • 9.­7
  • 9.­169-170
  • 9.­309
  • 9.­349
  • 9.­351
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­12
  • 10.­20-21
  • 10.­24
  • 10.­27
  • 11.­99
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­104
  • 11.­131
  • 11.­134
  • 11.­196
  • 11.­313
  • g.­268
  • g.­377
g.­268

Pratyekabuddhayāna

Wylie:
  • rang sangs rgyas kyi theg pa
Tibetan:
  • རང་སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཐེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • pratyeka­buddhayāna AS

The vehicle of the pratyekabuddhas.

Located in 13 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­192
  • 4.­244
  • 4.­268
  • 4.­395-396
  • 9.­332
  • 9.­363
  • 9.­367
  • 10.­15-16
  • 11.­72
  • n.­119
  • g.­154
g.­269

preta

Wylie:
  • yi dwags
  • yi dags
Tibetan:
  • ཡི་དྭགས།
  • ཡི་དགས།
Sanskrit:
  • preta AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the five or six classes of sentient beings, into which beings are born as the karmic fruition of past miserliness. As the term in Sanskrit means “the departed,” they are analogous to the ancestral spirits of Vedic tradition, the pitṛs, who starve without the offerings of descendants. It is also commonly translated as “hungry ghost” or “starving spirit,” as in the Chinese 餓鬼 e gui.

They are sometimes said to reside in the realm of Yama, but are also frequently described as roaming charnel grounds and other inhospitable or frightening places along with piśācas and other such beings. They are particularly known to suffer from great hunger and thirst and the inability to acquire sustenance.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­69
  • 4.­374
  • 7.­55
  • 7.­60
  • 8.­3
  • g.­227
  • g.­372
g.­270

protector of the world

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten mgon po
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་མགོན་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • lokanātha AS

An epithet of a buddha.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­212
  • 2.­9
  • 2.­49
  • 2.­51
  • 2.­61
  • 2.­66
  • 2.­71
  • 4.­215
  • 6.­6
  • 7.­321
  • 9.­63
  • 9.­110
  • 9.­129
  • 9.­136
  • 9.­141
  • 9.­183
  • 9.­218
  • 9.­262
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­20
  • 11.­216
g.­272

pure abodes

Wylie:
  • gtsang ma’i ris
Tibetan:
  • གཙང་མའི་རིས།
Sanskrit:
  • śuddhāvāsa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The five Pure Abodes are the highest heavens of the Form Realm (rūpadhātu). They are called “pure abodes” because ordinary beings (pṛthagjana; so so’i skye bo) cannot be born there; only those who have achieved the fruit of a non-returner (anāgāmin; phyir mi ’ong) can be born there. A summary presentation of them is found in the third chapter of Vasubandhu's Abhidharmakośa, although they are repeatedly mentioned as a set in numerous sūtras, tantras, and vinaya texts.

The five Pure Abodes are the last five of the seventeen levels of the Form Realm. Specifically, they are the last five of the eight levels of the upper Form Realm‍—which corresponds to the fourth meditative concentration (dhyāna; bsam gtan)‍—all of which are described as “immovable” (akopya; mi g.yo ba) since they are never destroyed during the cycles of the destruction and reformation of a world system. In particular, the five are Abṛha (mi che ba), the inferior heaven; Atapa (mi gdung ba), the heaven of no torment; Sudṛśa (gya nom snang), the heaven of sublime appearances; Sudarśana (shin tu mthong), the heaven of the most beautiful to behold; and Akaniṣṭha (’og min), the highest heaven.

Yaśomitra explains their names, stating: (1) because those who abide there can only remain for a fixed amount of time, before they are plucked out (√bṛh, bṛṃhanti) of that heaven, or because it is not as extensive (abṛṃhita) as the others in the pure realms, that heaven is called the inferior heaven (abṛha; mi che ba); (2) since the afflictions can no longer torment (√tap, tapanti) those who reside there because of their having attained a particular samādhi, or because their state of mind is virtuous, they no longer torment (√tap, tāpayanti) others, this heaven, consequently, is called the heaven of no torment (atapa; mi gdung ba); (3) since those who reside there have exceptional (suṣṭhu) vision because what they see (√dṛś, darśana) is utterly pure, that heaven is called the heaven of sublime appearances (sudṛśa; gya nom snang); (4) because those who reside there are beautiful gods, that heaven is called the heaven of the most beautiful to behold (sudarśana; shin tu mthong); and (5) since it is not lower (na kaniṣṭhā) than any other heaven because there is no other place superior to it, this heaven is called the highest heaven (akaniṣṭha; ’og min) since it is the uppermost.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­247
  • 11.­252
  • g.­136
  • g.­137
  • g.­142
  • g.­144
g.­275

Rājagṛha

Wylie:
  • rgyal po’i khab
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་པོའི་ཁབ།
Sanskrit:
  • rājagṛha AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The ancient capital of Magadha prior to its relocation to Pāṭaliputra during the Mauryan dynasty, Rājagṛha is one of the most important locations in Buddhist history. The literature tells us that the Buddha and his saṅgha spent a considerable amount of time in residence in and around Rājagṛha‍—in nearby places, such as the Vulture Peak Mountain (Gṛdhrakūṭaparvata), a major site of the Mahāyāna sūtras, and the Bamboo Grove (Veṇuvana)‍—enjoying the patronage of King Bimbisāra and then of his son King Ajātaśatru. Rājagṛha is also remembered as the location where the first Buddhist monastic council was held after the Buddha Śākyamuni passed into parinirvāṇa. Now known as Rajgir and located in the modern Indian state of Bihar.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2-3
  • 1.­4-5
  • 1.­7-8
  • 2.­1-2
  • 2.­6
  • 2.­46-47
  • 11.­295-296
  • g.­22
  • g.­32
  • g.­173
g.­278

Ratna

Wylie:
  • rin po che
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ།
Sanskrit:
  • ratna AS

A brahmin preceptor during the time of the Buddha Dīpaṅkara.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­258-260
g.­280

Ratnāṅga

Wylie:
  • dkon mchog yan lag
Tibetan:
  • དཀོན་མཆོག་ཡན་ལག
Sanskrit:
  • ratnāṅga AS

A buddha in the distant past.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • i.­11
  • 11.­236
  • 11.­240-243
  • g.­166
  • g.­340
g.­282

recollection

Wylie:
  • dran pa
Tibetan:
  • དྲན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • smṛti AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This is the faculty that enables the mind to maintain its attention on a referent object, counteracting the arising of forgetfulness, which is a great obstacle to meditative stability. The root smṛ may mean “to recollect” but also simply “to think of.” Broadly speaking, smṛti, commonly translated as “mindfulness,” means to bring something to mind, not necessarily something experienced in a distant past but also something that is experienced in the present, such as the position of one’s body or the breath.

Together with alertness (samprajāna, shes bzhin), it is one of the two indispensable factors for the development of calm abiding (śamatha, zhi gnas).

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­124
  • 4.­242-243
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­256
  • 4.­258
  • 7.­211
  • 9.­273
  • 10.­6
  • 10.­17
  • 10.­37
  • 11.­110
  • n.­42
  • g.­103
  • g.­315
g.­283

reification

Wylie:
  • yang dag pa ma yin pa ’dzin pa
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པ་མ་ཡིན་པ་འཛིན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhūtagrāha AS

“Grasping at the unreal,” creating concepts about an object’s status as real beyond it being a dependently arising phenomenon.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­168
  • 1.­170
  • 11.­66
g.­284

renunciant

Wylie:
  • rab tu byung ba
Tibetan:
  • རབ་ཏུ་བྱུང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • pravrajita AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit pravrajyā literally means “going forth,” with the sense of leaving the life of a householder and embracing the life of a renunciant. When the term is applied more technically, it refers to the act of becoming a male novice (śrāmaṇera; dge tshul) or female novice (śrāmaṇerikā; dge tshul ma), this being a first stage leading to full ordination.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­166
  • 2.­18
  • 3.­28
  • 7.­335
  • 9.­38
  • 9.­124
  • 9.­187
  • 9.­193-194
  • 9.­278
  • 9.­282
  • 9.­295
  • 9.­298-299
  • 11.­215
g.­286

sage

Wylie:
  • thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • muni AS

An epithet of a buddha.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­10
  • 2.­11
  • 4.­7
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­35
  • 4.­38
  • 4.­257
  • 4.­327
  • 4.­338
  • 4.­356
  • 7.­178
  • 7.­328
  • 9.­138
  • 9.­362
  • 11.­18
  • g.­18
g.­291

Śākyamuni

Wylie:
  • shAkya thub pa
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱཀྱ་ཐུབ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śākyamuni AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

An epithet for the historical Buddha, Siddhārtha Gautama: he was a muni (“sage”) from the Śākya clan. He is counted as the fourth of the first four buddhas of the present Good Eon, the other three being Krakucchanda, Kanakamuni, and Kāśyapa. He will be followed by Maitreya, the next buddha in this eon.

Located in 21 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­11
  • 9.­66
  • 9.­312
  • 11.­275
  • 11.­277
  • 11.­281-282
  • g.­50
  • g.­69
  • g.­168
  • g.­199
  • g.­212
  • g.­216
  • g.­240
  • g.­274
  • g.­302
  • g.­332
  • g.­337
  • g.­340
  • g.­403
g.­293

Samacitta

Wylie:
  • sems snyoms
Tibetan:
  • སེམས་སྙོམས།
Sanskrit:
  • samacitta AS

The name of the merchant Naradatta when he attains buddhahood in the distant future.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­311
g.­295

saṃsāra

Wylie:
  • ’khor ba
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃsāra AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A state of involuntary existence conditioned by afflicted mental states and the imprint of past actions, characterized by suffering in a cycle of life, death, and rebirth. On its reversal, the contrasting state of nirvāṇa is attained, free from suffering and the processes of rebirth.

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 4.­284
  • 4.­389
  • 9.­165
  • 9.­334
  • g.­156
  • g.­187
g.­298

saṅgha

Wylie:
  • dge ’dun
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་འདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saṅgha AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

Though often specifically reserved for the monastic community, this term can be applied to any of the four Buddhist communities‍—monks, nuns, laymen, and laywomen‍—as well as to identify the different groups of practitioners, like the community of bodhisattvas or the community of śrāvakas. It is also the third of the Three Jewels (triratna) of Buddhism: the Buddha, the Teaching, and the Community.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­48
  • 3.­21
  • 4.­42
  • 4.­297
  • 4.­312
  • 7.­254
  • 7.­328
  • 7.­335
  • 8.­5-6
  • 9.­108
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­167
  • 9.­356
  • 9.­373
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­18
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­302
  • g.­255
g.­299

Śāriputra

Wylie:
  • shA ri’i bu
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱ་རིའི་བུ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāriputra AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One of the principal śrāvaka disciples of the Buddha, he was renowned for his discipline and for having been praised by the Buddha as foremost of the wise (often paired with Maudgalyā­yana, who was praised as foremost in the capacity for miraculous powers). His father, Tiṣya, to honor Śāriputra’s mother, Śārikā, named him Śāradvatīputra, or, in its contracted form, Śāriputra, meaning “Śārikā’s Son.”

Located in 524 passages in the translation:

  • i.­4
  • i.­6
  • i.­8
  • 3.­1-3
  • 3.­10-11
  • 3.­14-15
  • 3.­21
  • 3.­24-25
  • 3.­33
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­14
  • 4.­17
  • 4.­29-32
  • 4.­44-49
  • 4.­51
  • 4.­55
  • 4.­62-68
  • 4.­80-82
  • 4.­84-99
  • 4.­106-116
  • 4.­123-134
  • 4.­136
  • 4.­138-140
  • 4.­145-146
  • 4.­148-149
  • 4.­159-160
  • 4.­162
  • 4.­171-173
  • 4.­175
  • 4.­187-189
  • 4.­193
  • 4.­202-203
  • 4.­206-207
  • 4.­211
  • 4.­222-223
  • 4.­226-227
  • 4.­229
  • 4.­241-243
  • 4.­245
  • 4.­255-256
  • 4.­258
  • 4.­266-269
  • 4.­279-282
  • 4.­284
  • 4.­286-287
  • 4.­290-291
  • 4.­302
  • 4.­304-305
  • 4.­317
  • 4.­320-321
  • 4.­339-340
  • 4.­342-356
  • 4.­358
  • 4.­376-398
  • 4.­423-424
  • 5.­1-3
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­1-18
  • 6.­33
  • 7.­1
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­28
  • 7.­41-43
  • 7.­54-55
  • 7.­66-67
  • 7.­83-84
  • 7.­100-101
  • 7.­119-120
  • 7.­135-136
  • 7.­152-153
  • 7.­173-175
  • 7.­191-194
  • 7.­203-213
  • 7.­215-225
  • 7.­250-256
  • 7.­285
  • 7.­287-293
  • 7.­306
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­332-336
  • 7.­340
  • 7.­342-347
  • 7.­372-375
  • 8.­1-5
  • 8.­11
  • 8.­20-24
  • 8.­54-57
  • 8.­61
  • 9.­1-8
  • 9.­14-15
  • 9.­17
  • 9.­19-21
  • 9.­30-43
  • 9.­65
  • 9.­67-71
  • 9.­77-79
  • 9.­86
  • 9.­92-94
  • 9.­97
  • 9.­103
  • 9.­109
  • 9.­112
  • 9.­118
  • 9.­120
  • 9.­122
  • 9.­125
  • 9.­127
  • 9.­133
  • 9.­135
  • 9.­144
  • 9.­157
  • 9.­159
  • 9.­162
  • 9.­164-165
  • 9.­167-172
  • 9.­174-180
  • 9.­194-195
  • 9.­198-201
  • 9.­203-204
  • 9.­206
  • 9.­210
  • 9.­212
  • 9.­226
  • 9.­231
  • 9.­243
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­267
  • 9.­271-273
  • 9.­282-285
  • 9.­301-313
  • 9.­316
  • 9.­319
  • 9.­321
  • 9.­324
  • 9.­332-333
  • 9.­335-339
  • 9.­349-356
  • 9.­362
  • 9.­365
  • 9.­367-371
  • 9.­373-375
  • 10.­1-4
  • 10.­7-24
  • 10.­27-29
  • 11.­1-4
  • 11.­17-18
  • 11.­25-26
  • 11.­35-36
  • 11.­41
  • 11.­47-51
  • 11.­53-56
  • 11.­122
  • 11.­130-136
  • 11.­144
  • 11.­175
  • 11.­194
  • 11.­196
  • 11.­198
  • 11.­204
  • 11.­217
  • 11.­233-238
  • 11.­240-247
  • 11.­252-255
  • 11.­259-260
  • 11.­263
  • 11.­275-276
  • 11.­278-282
  • 11.­284
  • 11.­326
  • 11.­331
g.­300

Sārthavāha

Wylie:
  • ded dpon
Tibetan:
  • དེད་དཔོན།
Sanskrit:
  • —

A buddha in this sūtra.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­309
g.­303

seat of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi snying po
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་སྙིང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • bodhimaṇḍa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The place where the Buddha Śākyamuni achieved awakening and where every buddha will manifest the attainment of buddhahood. In our world this is understood to be located under the Bodhi tree, the Vajrāsana, in present-day Bodhgaya, India. It can also refer to the state of awakening itself.

Located in 16 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­6
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­408
  • 6.­9
  • 7.­82
  • 7.­114
  • 7.­159
  • 7.­213
  • 7.­267
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­132
  • 11.­166
  • 11.­182
  • 11.­197
g.­304

self

Wylie:
  • bdag
Tibetan:
  • བདག
Sanskrit:
  • ātman AS

The idea of an autonomous individual.

Located in 109 passages in the translation:

  • i.­12
  • 1.­48
  • 1.­51
  • 1.­128
  • 1.­136-139
  • 1.­145
  • 1.­154-155
  • 1.­161
  • 1.­163
  • 1.­169
  • 1.­171
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­29
  • 3.­31-32
  • 4.­25
  • 4.­206
  • 4.­261-264
  • 4.­275
  • 4.­298
  • 4.­342
  • 4.­355
  • 4.­372
  • 4.­388
  • 5.­8
  • 5.­10
  • 5.­14
  • 5.­17
  • 5.­21
  • 5.­27
  • 6.­30
  • 7.­3
  • 7.­11
  • 7.­13-15
  • 7.­17-19
  • 7.­104
  • 7.­118
  • 7.­153
  • 7.­185
  • 7.­187
  • 7.­253
  • 7.­287-288
  • 7.­334-335
  • 7.­355-371
  • 7.­374
  • 8.­42
  • 8.­49
  • 9.­78
  • 9.­82
  • 9.­84-85
  • 9.­194
  • 9.­214
  • 9.­228
  • 10.­13
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­23
  • 10.­26
  • 10.­50
  • 11.­48
  • 11.­53
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­57
  • 11.­60
  • 11.­62
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­97
  • 11.­115
  • 11.­122-123
  • 11.­126
  • 11.­133-134
  • 11.­146
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­185
  • 11.­190
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­200
  • g.­100
g.­305

sense field

Wylie:
  • skye mched
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད།
Sanskrit:
  • āyatana AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

These can be listed as twelve or as six sense sources (sometimes also called sense fields, bases of cognition, or simply āyatanas).

In the context of epistemology, it is one way of describing experience and the world in terms of twelve sense sources, which can be divided into inner and outer sense sources, namely: (1–2) eye and form, (3–4) ear and sound, (5–6) nose and odor, (7–8) tongue and taste, (9–10) body and touch, (11–12) mind and mental phenomena.

In the context of the twelve links of dependent origination, only six sense sources are mentioned, and they are the inner sense sources (identical to the six faculties) of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­143
  • 1.­149
  • 1.­188
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­353
  • 4.­355-356
  • 7.­371
  • 8.­57
  • 9.­334-335
  • 11.­56
  • 11.­62-64
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­90
  • 11.­122
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­283
g.­306

seven factors of awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi yan lag bdun
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཡན་ལག་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saptabodhyaṅga AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The set of seven factors or aspects that characteristically manifest on the path of seeing: (1) mindfulness (smṛti, dran pa), (2) discrimination between dharmas (dharmapravicaya, chos rab tu rnam ’byed/shes rab), (3) diligence (vīrya, brtson ’grus), (4) joy (prīti, dga’ ba), (5) mental and physical ease (praśrabdhi, shin sbyangs), (6) meditative absorption (samādhi, ting nge ’dzin), and (7) equanimity (upekṣā, btang snyoms).

In this text:

See also 11.­136.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­136
  • 11.­144
  • g.­90
  • g.­365
g.­307

seven kinds of riches

Wylie:
  • nor bdun
Tibetan:
  • ནོར་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saptadhana AS

Listed here as faith, morality, conscience, moral sensitivity, learning, renunciations, and wisdom.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­102
  • 7.­179-180
  • 11.­103
g.­309

seven precious implements

Wylie:
  • rin po che sna bdun
Tibetan:
  • རིན་པོ་ཆེ་སྣ་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • saptaratna AS

The seven possessions of a king of the entire world: the precious wheel, the precious elephant, the precious horse, the precious jewel, the precious queen, the precious householder, and the precious minister.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­210
  • 11.­237
g.­311

seven states of consciousness

Wylie:
  • rnam par shes pa gnas pa bdun
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་ཤེས་པ་གནས་པ་བདུན།
Sanskrit:
  • sapta­vijñānasthiti AS

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­127
g.­312

Śīlendra

Wylie:
  • shI len dra bo d+hi
Tibetan:
  • ཤཱི་ལེན་དྲ་བོ་དྷི།
Sanskrit:
  • śīlendrabodhi

An Indian paṇḍita resident in Tibet during the late eighth and early ninth centuries.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • c.­1
g.­313

six perfections

Wylie:
  • pha rol tu phyin pa drug
Tibetan:
  • ཕ་རོལ་ཏུ་ཕྱིན་པ་དྲུག
Sanskrit:
  • ṣaṭpāramitā AS

The practice of the bodhisatva, which consists of generosity (dāna), morality (śīla), patient acceptance (kṣānti), vigor (vīrya), meditation (dhyāna), and wisdom (prajñā).

Located in 7 passages in the translation:

  • s.­1
  • i.­7
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­1
  • 11.­326
  • g.­262
  • g.­400
g.­314

six sense fields

Wylie:
  • skye mched drug
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེ་མཆེད་དྲུག
Sanskrit:
  • ṣaḍāyatana AS

May refer to the six sense organs (eyes, ears, nose, tongue, body, and thinking mind) together with their respective objects (forms, sounds, smells, tastes, touch, and dharmas). In the context of the twelve links of dependent origination, only six sense sources are mentioned, and they are the inner sense sources (similar to the six faculties) of eye, ear, nose, tongue, body, and mind.

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­141
  • 1.­149-150
  • 3.­18
  • 4.­224
  • 5.­13
  • 11.­127
  • 11.­183
g.­316

sixty-two kinds of views

Wylie:
  • lta ba’i rnam pa drug cu rtsa gnyis
Tibetan:
  • ལྟ་བའི་རྣམ་པ་དྲུག་ཅུ་རྩ་གཉིས།
Sanskrit:
  • dvāṣaṣṭidṛṣṛṭikṛta AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The sixty-two false views, as enumerated in the Brahma­jāla­sūtra (tshangs pa’i dra ba’i mdo, Toh 352), comprise eighteen speculations concerning the past, based on theories of eternalism, partial eternalism, extensionism, endless equivocation, and fortuitous origination, as well as forty-four speculations concerning the future, based on percipient immortality, non-percipient immortality, neither percipient nor non-percipient immortality, annihilationism, and the immediate attainment of nirvāṇa in the present life.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­55
g.­317

skandha

Wylie:
  • phung po
Tibetan:
  • ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • skandha AS

Psychophysical constituents that make up the individual, divided into five group. See “five skandhas.”

Located in 36 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­57
  • 1.­138
  • 1.­142-143
  • 1.­164
  • 1.­166-167
  • 1.­198-200
  • 3.­13
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­49
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­353
  • 4.­355-356
  • 7.­339
  • 7.­374
  • 9.­320
  • 9.­334-335
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­28
  • 11.­55-58
  • 11.­65
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­88
  • 11.­122
  • 11.­157
  • 11.­283
  • g.­100
  • g.­114
g.­321

śrāvaka

Wylie:
  • nyan thos
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvaka AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Sanskrit term śrāvaka, and the Tibetan nyan thos, both derived from the verb “to hear,” are usually defined as “those who hear the teaching from the Buddha and make it heard to others.” Primarily this refers to those disciples of the Buddha who aspire to attain the state of an arhat seeking their own liberation and nirvāṇa. They are the practitioners of the first turning of the wheel of the Dharma on the four noble truths, who realize the suffering inherent in saṃsāra and focus on understanding that there is no independent self. By conquering afflicted mental states (kleśa), they liberate themselves, attaining first the stage of stream enterers at the path of seeing, followed by the stage of once-returners who will be reborn only one more time, and then the stage of non-returners who will no longer be reborn into the desire realm. The final goal is to become an arhat. These four stages are also known as the “four results of spiritual practice.”

Located in 74 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • 2.­7
  • 2.­37
  • 2.­43
  • 2.­48
  • 4.­108
  • 4.­111-114
  • 4.­118
  • 4.­147
  • 4.­155
  • 4.­201
  • 4.­229
  • 4.­239
  • 4.­244
  • 4.­257
  • 4.­263
  • 4.­272
  • 4.­391
  • 4.­396-397
  • 4.­411
  • 5.­2
  • 5.­8
  • 6.­6
  • 6.­15-16
  • 7.­120
  • 7.­219
  • 7.­290
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­344
  • 9.­7
  • 9.­79
  • 9.­98-102
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­284
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­303
  • 9.­309
  • 9.­349
  • 9.­351
  • 9.­354
  • 9.­369
  • 9.­373
  • 10.­12
  • 10.­20-21
  • 10.­24
  • 10.­27
  • 11.­104
  • 11.­131
  • 11.­134
  • 11.­196
  • 11.­234-236
  • 11.­241-242
  • 11.­256
  • 11.­262
  • 11.­275
  • n.­106
  • g.­71
  • g.­85
  • g.­322
  • g.­377
g.­322

Śrāvakayāna

Wylie:
  • nyan thos kyi theg pa
Tibetan:
  • ཉན་ཐོས་ཀྱི་ཐེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvakayāna AS

The vehicle of the śrāvakas.

Located in 14 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­192
  • 4.­244
  • 4.­268
  • 4.­395-396
  • 5.­28
  • 9.­332
  • 9.­363
  • 9.­367
  • 10.­15-16
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­292
  • g.­154
g.­323

Śrāvastī

Wylie:
  • mnyan yod
Tibetan:
  • མཉན་ཡོད།
Sanskrit:
  • śrāvastī AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

During the life of the Buddha, Śrāvastī was the capital city of the powerful kingdom of Kośala, ruled by King Prasenajit, who became a follower and patron of the Buddha. It was also the hometown of Anāthapiṇḍada, the wealthy patron who first invited the Buddha there, and then offered him a park known as Jetavana, Prince Jeta’s Grove, which became one of the first Buddhist monasteries. The Buddha is said to have spent about twenty-five rainy seasons with his disciples in Śrāvastī, thus it is named as the setting of numerous events and teachings. It is located in present-day Uttar Pradesh in northern India.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 1.­2
g.­324

stage

Wylie:
  • sa
Tibetan:
  • ས།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūmi AS

Eight or ten levels or stages through which the bodhisatva traverses on the journey to complete awakening.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • 2.­48
  • 3.­2
  • 3.­12
  • 3.­14
  • 4.­68
  • 4.­77
g.­325

stream enterer

Wylie:
  • rgyun tu zhugs pa
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱུན་ཏུ་ཞུགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • srotaāpanna AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

One who has achieved the first level of attainment on the path of the śrāvakas, and who has entered the “stream” of practice that leads to nirvāṇa. (Provisional 84000 definition. New definition forthcoming.)

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­137
  • 9.­170
  • 9.­304
  • 11.­99
g.­331

Sudarśana

Wylie:
  • mdzes par snang ba
Tibetan:
  • མཛེས་པར་སྣང་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • sudarśana AS

A king in the past.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­237-238
  • g.­166
g.­336

summit of existence

Wylie:
  • yang dag pa’i mtha’
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པའི་མཐའ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūtakoṭi AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This term has three meanings: (1) the ultimate nature, (2) the experience of the ultimate nature, and (3) the quiescent state of a worthy one (arhat) to be avoided by bodhisattvas.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­348
  • 4.­356
  • 11.­72
  • g.­387
  • g.­388
g.­339

superior ability

Wylie:
  • mngon par shes pa
Tibetan:
  • མངོན་པར་ཤེས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • abhijñā AS

Superior knowledge or higher perception particular to a Buddha; it is of six types: divine sight (divyacakṣu), divine hearing (divyaśrotra), knowing the minds of others (paracittajñāna), knowing their particular dispositions (cetaḥ­paryāya­jñāna), the ability to remember past lives (pūrva­nivāsānu­smṛti­jñāna), and possessing miraculous powers (ṛddhividhi­jñānaṃ).

Located in 27 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­3
  • 5.­2
  • 9.­332
  • 10.­6-7
  • 10.­10-14
  • 10.­16-21
  • 10.­24-25
  • 10.­27
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­48
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­114
  • 11.­130
  • 11.­173
  • 11.­247
  • 11.­277
g.­340

Suprajña

Wylie:
  • shes rab bzang
Tibetan:
  • ཤེས་རབ་བཟང་།
Sanskrit:
  • suprajña AS

A merchant in the distant past, during the time of the Buddha Ratnāṅga. A past life of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 5 passages in the translation:

  • i.­11
  • 11.­239-242
g.­342

Surendra

Wylie:
  • su ren+t+ra bo d+hi
  • su ren+d+ra bo d+hi
Tibetan:
  • སུ་རེནྟྲ་བོ་དྷི།
  • སུ་རེནྡྲ་བོ་དྷི།
Sanskrit:
  • surendrabodhi

Surendrabodhi came to Tibet during reign of King Ralpachen (ral pa can, r. 815–38 ᴄᴇ). He is listed as the translator of forty-three texts and was one of the small group of paṇḍitas responsible for the Mahāvyutpatti Sanskrit–Tibetan dictionary.

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • i.­13
  • c.­1
g.­347

tathāgata

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgata AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A frequently used synonym for buddha. According to different explanations, it can be read as tathā-gata, literally meaning “one who has thus gone,” or as tathā-āgata, “one who has thus come.” Gata, though literally meaning “gone,” is a past passive participle used to describe a state or condition of existence. Tatha­(tā), often rendered as “suchness” or “thusness,” is the quality or condition of things as they really are, which cannot be conveyed in conceptual, dualistic terms. Therefore, this epithet is interpreted in different ways, but in general it implies one who has departed in the wake of the buddhas of the past, or one who has manifested the supreme awakening dependent on the reality that does not abide in the two extremes of existence and quiescence. It is also often used as a specific epithet of the Buddha Śākyamuni.

Located in 361 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5-6
  • i.­9
  • i.­11
  • 1.­3
  • 1.­5-6
  • 1.­60
  • 1.­203
  • 2.­4
  • 2.­38
  • 2.­64-65
  • 3.­1-2
  • 3.­13
  • 3.­31
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­14
  • 4.­17
  • 4.­26
  • 4.­29-32
  • 4.­42-48
  • 4.­62-65
  • 4.­67-68
  • 4.­80-83
  • 4.­85-99
  • 4.­106-109
  • 4.­112-116
  • 4.­119
  • 4.­123-125
  • 4.­138-140
  • 4.­145-149
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­159-162
  • 4.­171-173
  • 4.­175
  • 4.­187-193
  • 4.­202-211
  • 4.­221
  • 4.­223-229
  • 4.­241-245
  • 4.­255-258
  • 4.­266-269
  • 4.­279-291
  • 4.­302-306
  • 4.­318-321
  • 4.­323
  • 4.­339-355
  • 4.­357-358
  • 4.­366
  • 4.­376-398
  • 4.­422-425
  • 5.­2-3
  • 5.­22-23
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­8
  • 6.­12-16
  • 7.­214-224
  • 7.­255
  • 7.­290
  • 7.­292-294
  • 7.­297-298
  • 7.­300
  • 7.­304
  • 7.­306
  • 7.­308
  • 7.­310
  • 7.­316
  • 7.­320
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­335
  • 8.­7-8
  • 8.­23
  • 8.­55
  • 9.­6
  • 9.­14
  • 9.­18
  • 9.­20
  • 9.­30
  • 9.­39
  • 9.­43
  • 9.­66
  • 9.­70
  • 9.­77
  • 9.­79
  • 9.­84
  • 9.­112
  • 9.­114
  • 9.­127
  • 9.­133-135
  • 9.­141
  • 9.­144
  • 9.­148
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­166
  • 9.­169-170
  • 9.­177
  • 9.­179
  • 9.­198
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­203-204
  • 9.­231
  • 9.­234
  • 9.­243
  • 9.­257
  • 9.­261
  • 9.­263
  • 9.­274
  • 9.­282
  • 9.­284-286
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­303-305
  • 9.­307
  • 9.­309-310
  • 9.­312
  • 9.­335
  • 9.­349
  • 9.­351
  • 9.­354-356
  • 9.­359-362
  • 9.­367-370
  • 9.­372-374
  • 10.­13
  • 10.­23
  • 10.­27
  • 10.­44
  • 11.­2-3
  • 11.­36
  • 11.­41
  • 11.­46
  • 11.­99
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­122
  • 11.­202
  • 11.­233-236
  • 11.­240-243
  • 11.­252
  • 11.­254-257
  • 11.­262-263
  • 11.­266
  • 11.­269
  • 11.­271-279
  • 11.­281-282
  • 11.­291-292
  • 11.­294
  • 11.­296
  • 11.­309
  • 11.­311-313
  • 11.­315
  • 11.­318
  • 11.­327
  • n.­52
  • n.­115
  • g.­255
  • g.­349
  • g.­380
g.­348

tathāgata power

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa’i stobs
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པའི་སྟོབས།
Sanskrit:
  • —

See “ten powers.”

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­1
  • 4.­124-125
  • 4.­145-146
  • 4.­159
  • 4.­171
  • 4.­187
  • 4.­202
  • 4.­222
  • 4.­241
  • 4.­255
  • 4.­266-267
  • 4.­279
g.­349

Tathāgatayāna

Wylie:
  • de bzhin gshegs pa’i theg pa
Tibetan:
  • དེ་བཞིན་གཤེགས་པའི་ཐེག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • tathāgatayāna AS

The vehicle of the tathāgatas.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­285
g.­350

teacher

Wylie:
  • ston pa
Tibetan:
  • སྟོན་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • śāstṛ AS

An epithet of a buddha.

Located in 96 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­88
  • 1.­109
  • 1.­211
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­49
  • 2.­60
  • 2.­72
  • 4.­18
  • 4.­100
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­141-143
  • 4.­194
  • 4.­214
  • 4.­246
  • 4.­253
  • 4.­276
  • 4.­285
  • 4.­399
  • 4.­406
  • 5.­2
  • 5.­14
  • 5.­22-23
  • 6.­15
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­27
  • 7.­29-30
  • 7.­41
  • 7.­44
  • 7.­54-56
  • 7.­63
  • 7.­65-68
  • 7.­72
  • 7.­79
  • 7.­83-85
  • 7.­97
  • 7.­100-102
  • 7.­119-122
  • 7.­133
  • 7.­135-137
  • 7.­150
  • 7.­152
  • 7.­158-160
  • 7.­173-176
  • 7.­191-192
  • 7.­211-214
  • 7.­250
  • 7.­257
  • 7.­290
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­329
  • 8.­21
  • 9.­39
  • 9.­47
  • 9.­59
  • 9.­77
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­282
  • 9.­284
  • 11.­103-104
  • 11.­107-109
  • 11.­112
  • 11.­180
  • 11.­224
  • 11.­260-261
  • 11.­317
g.­352

teaching

Wylie:
  • chos
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharma AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The term dharma conveys ten different meanings, according to Vasubandhu’s Vyākhyā­yukti. The primary meanings are as follows: the doctrine taught by the Buddha (Dharma); the ultimate reality underlying and expressed through the Buddha’s teaching (Dharma); the trainings that the Buddha’s teaching stipulates (dharmas); the various awakened qualities or attainments acquired through practicing and realizing the Buddha’s teaching (dharmas); qualities or aspects more generally, i.e., phenomena or phenomenal attributes (dharmas); and mental objects (dharmas).

Located in 179 passages in the translation:

  • i.­1
  • i.­3
  • i.­6
  • i.­9
  • i.­11
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­187
  • 1.­196
  • 2.­20
  • 2.­37-38
  • 2.­40
  • 2.­48
  • 2.­60
  • 2.­67
  • 2.­74
  • 2.­76
  • 3.­12
  • 3.­18
  • 3.­20
  • 3.­22
  • 3.­31
  • 3.­33
  • 4.­30
  • 4.­199-201
  • 4.­204
  • 4.­231
  • 4.­275
  • 4.­382
  • 4.­390
  • 4.­395
  • 5.­1
  • 5.­3
  • 5.­22-23
  • 6.­8
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­23
  • 7.­26-27
  • 7.­41
  • 7.­44
  • 7.­54-55
  • 7.­66-67
  • 7.­72
  • 7.­74
  • 7.­83
  • 7.­85
  • 7.­94
  • 7.­100
  • 7.­120
  • 7.­127
  • 7.­130
  • 7.­136
  • 7.­140
  • 7.­149
  • 7.­170
  • 7.­174
  • 7.­177-178
  • 7.­181
  • 7.­183
  • 7.­192
  • 7.­213-214
  • 7.­225
  • 7.­254
  • 7.­263
  • 7.­265
  • 7.­268
  • 7.­274
  • 7.­276
  • 7.­303
  • 7.­305
  • 7.­307
  • 7.­310
  • 7.­312
  • 7.­318
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­330-331
  • 9.­2-4
  • 9.­6
  • 9.­10-11
  • 9.­14-17
  • 9.­23
  • 9.­26
  • 9.­37
  • 9.­60
  • 9.­62
  • 9.­64-65
  • 9.­68
  • 9.­92
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­244
  • 9.­298
  • 9.­300
  • 9.­304
  • 9.­352-353
  • 9.­356-358
  • 9.­361-363
  • 9.­365
  • 9.­367
  • 9.­374-375
  • 10.­13
  • 10.­20-21
  • 11.­1
  • 11.­3-4
  • 11.­8
  • 11.­18
  • 11.­25-26
  • 11.­31-32
  • 11.­36
  • 11.­41-42
  • 11.­47
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­65-66
  • 11.­75
  • 11.­77
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­82-83
  • 11.­85
  • 11.­98-99
  • 11.­102-103
  • 11.­107
  • 11.­112-113
  • 11.­118
  • 11.­130
  • 11.­134
  • 11.­138
  • 11.­168
  • 11.­176
  • 11.­179
  • 11.­197-198
  • 11.­200
  • 11.­204
  • 11.­209
  • 11.­215
  • 11.­226
  • 11.­240
  • 11.­266
  • 11.­280-281
  • 11.­283-285
  • 11.­326
  • 11.­332
  • n.­11
  • n.­43
  • g.­121
g.­356

ten powers

Wylie:
  • stobs bcu
Tibetan:
  • སྟོབས་བཅུ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśabala AS

Ten things that a buddha knows: (1) what is possible and what is impossible, (2) karmic maturation, (3) various elements, (4) various inclinations, (5) levels of ability, (6) every path of travel, (7) the pure and afflicted sides of concentration, meditative states, and absorptions, (8) memory of former abodes, (9) death and rebirth, and (10) that the defilements have been eliminated. These are listed in more detail at F.10.b.

Located in 20 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­123
  • 2.­50
  • 3.­13
  • 4.­27
  • 4.­58
  • 4.­61
  • 4.­85
  • 4.­102-105
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­144
  • 4.­335
  • 4.­338
  • 6.­12
  • 9.­234
  • 10.­36
  • g.­348
  • g.­380
g.­361

ten unwholesome forms of conduct

Wylie:
  • mi dge ba bcu’i las kyi lam
Tibetan:
  • མི་དགེ་བ་བཅུའི་ལས་ཀྱི་ལམ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśākuśala­karmapatha AS

Taking life, taking what is not given, sexual misconduct, lying, slander, uttering harsh words, inane chatter, covetousness, maliciousness, and holding wrong views

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­75-76
  • 3.­15
  • 4.­301
  • 4.­332
  • 7.­101
  • g.­360
  • g.­362
  • g.­363
g.­363

ten wholesome forms of conduct

Wylie:
  • dge ba bcu’i las gyi lam
  • las lam bcu po
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བ་བཅུའི་ལས་གྱི་ལམ།
  • ལས་ལམ་བཅུ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • daśakuśa­lakarmapatha AS

These are the opposite of the ten unwholesome forms of conduct, i.e., refraining from engaging in the ten unwholesome form of conduct and (in some contexts) doing the opposite.

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­15
  • 4.­316
  • 5.­16
  • 5.­21
  • 7.­6
  • 9.­330-331
  • 11.­103
  • 11.­127
  • g.­364
g.­365

thirty-seven elements that are conducive to awakening

Wylie:
  • byang chub kyi phyogs kyi chos sum cu rtsa bdun gyi chos rnams
Tibetan:
  • བྱང་ཆུབ་ཀྱི་ཕྱོགས་ཀྱི་ཆོས་སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་བདུན་གྱི་ཆོས་རྣམས།
Sanskrit:
  • saptatriṅśad­bodhi­pakṣika­dharma AS

Thirty-seven practices that lead the practitioner to the awakened state: the four foundations of mindfulness, the four kinds of perfect exertion, the four foundations of magical abilities, the five faculties, the five powers, the noble eightfold path, and the seven factors of awakening.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 11.­83
  • g.­104
  • g.­108
  • g.­113
g.­367

thirty-two characteristics of a great being

Wylie:
  • skyes bu chen po’i mtshan sum cu rtsa gnyis
Tibetan:
  • སྐྱེས་བུ་ཆེན་པོའི་མཚན་སུམ་ཅུ་རྩ་གཉིས།
Sanskrit:
  • dvātriṃśanmahāpuruṣa­lakṣana AS

The main identifying physical characteristics of both buddhas and kings of the entire world (cakravartins), to which are added the “eighty minor marks.”

Located in 8 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­8
  • 6.­8
  • 9.­101
  • 11.­245
  • g.­52
  • g.­84
  • g.­366
  • g.­368
g.­369

three doors of liberation

Wylie:
  • rnam par thar pa’i sgo gsum
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་ཐར་པའི་སྒོ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trivimokṣa­mukha AS

See “three liberations.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 9.­173
  • g.­371
g.­371

three liberations

Wylie:
  • rnam par thar pa gsum
Tibetan:
  • རྣམ་པར་ཐར་པ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trivimokṣa AS

Emptiness, being without attributes, and being without aspiration. Also known as the “three doors of liberation.”

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­393
  • g.­186
  • g.­369
g.­372

three lower realms

Wylie:
  • ngan ’gro gsum
Tibetan:
  • ངན་འགྲོ་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • tridurgati AS

The realms of hell beings, pretas, and animals.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­17
  • 7.­91
  • 11.­294
  • g.­227
g.­373

three realms

Wylie:
  • khams gsum
  • khams gsum pa
Tibetan:
  • ཁམས་གསུམ།
  • ཁམས་གསུམ་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • traidhātu AS

The desire realm, form realm, and formless realm.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­19
  • 4.­118
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­168
  • 4.­284
  • 4.­345
  • 5.­18
  • 6.­9
  • 9.­173
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­166
  • 11.­192
  • 11.­195
  • g.­370
  • g.­378
g.­374

three spheres

Wylie:
  • ’khor gsum
Tibetan:
  • འཁོར་གསུམ།
Sanskrit:
  • trimaṇḍala AS

The triad of a subject, the doer; an object (direct or indirect) to which something is done; and the action of doing it. When a bodhisatva acts, none of these three aspects of the action are to be apprehended or conceptualized.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­346-347
  • 11.­83
g.­378

three worlds

Wylie:
  • ’jig rten gsum
  • ’jig rten gsum po
Tibetan:
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་གསུམ།
  • འཇིག་རྟེན་གསུམ་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • triloka AS

See also “three realms.”

Located in 10 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­104
  • 1.­108
  • 2.­48
  • 2.­64
  • 3.­14
  • 3.­22
  • 4.­14
  • 4.­328
  • 9.­99
  • 11.­122
g.­380

threefold knowledge

Wylie:
  • rigs gsum
  • gsum rig pa
Tibetan:
  • རིགས་གསུམ།
  • གསུམ་རིག་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • trividya AS
  • trividyā AS

The three kinds of knowledge obtained by the Buddha on the night of his enlightenment. These consist of the knowledge of the death and rebirth of sentient beings, the knowledge of past lives, and the knowledge of the cessation of defilements. These are the last three of the ten powers of the tathāgatas.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • 7.­275
  • 9.­128
  • 11.­258-259
g.­383

totality of phenomena

Wylie:
  • chos kyi dbyings
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་དབྱིངས།
Sanskrit:
  • dharmadhātu AS

Located in 33 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­9
  • 4.­14
  • 4.­16
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­45-46
  • 4.­48
  • 4.­50
  • 4.­61-62
  • 4.­98
  • 4.­257
  • 4.­285
  • 4.­288-289
  • 4.­303
  • 4.­319
  • 4.­348
  • 4.­356
  • 4.­384
  • 4.­394
  • 7.­183
  • 9.­333
  • 10.­13
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­23
  • 10.­25-26
  • 11.­72
  • 11.­74
  • 11.­89
  • 11.­98
  • 11.­133
g.­386

twelve links of dependent origination

Wylie:
  • rten cing ’brel bar ’byung ba yan lag bcu gnyis
Tibetan:
  • རྟེན་ཅིང་འབྲེལ་བར་འབྱུང་བ་ཡན་ལག་བཅུ་གཉིས།
Sanskrit:
  • dvāda­śāṅgapratītya­samutpāda

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The principle of dependent origination asserts that nothing exists independently of other factors, the reason for this being that things and events come into existence only by dependence on the aggregation of multiple causes and conditions. In general, the processes of cyclic existence, through which the external world and the sentient beings within it revolve in a continuous cycle of suffering, propelled by the propensities of past actions and their interaction with afflicted mental states, originate dependent on the sequential unfolding of twelve links: (1) fundamental ignorance, (2) formative predispositions, (3) consciousness, (4) name and form, (5) sense field, (6) sensory contact, (7) sensation, (8) craving, (9) grasping, (10) rebirth process, (11) actual birth, (12) aging and death. It is through deliberate reversal of these twelve links that one can succeed in bringing the whole cycle to an end.

Located in 4 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • g.­31
  • g.­314
  • g.­385
g.­387

ultimate goal

Wylie:
  • yang dag pa’i mtha’
Tibetan:
  • ཡང་དག་པའི་མཐའ།
Sanskrit:
  • bhūtakoṭi AS

See “summit of existence.”

Located in 2 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­32
  • 11.­133
g.­389

unique buddha qualities

Wylie:
  • sangs rgyas kyi chos ma ’dres pa rnams
Tibetan:
  • སངས་རྒྱས་ཀྱི་ཆོས་མ་འདྲེས་པ་རྣམས།
Sanskrit:
  • āveṇikā­buddha­dharma AS

See “eighteen unique buddha qualities.”

Located in 24 passages in the translation:

  • i.­5
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­15
  • 4.­377
  • 4.­380-398
  • 9.­14
g.­393

vajra

Wylie:
  • rdo rje
Tibetan:
  • རྡོ་རྗེ།
Sanskrit:
  • vajra AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

This term generally indicates indestructibility and stability. In the sūtras, vajra most often refers to the hardest possible physical substance, said to have divine origins. In some scriptures, it is also the name of the all-powerful weapon of Indra, which in turn is crafted from vajra material. In the tantras, the vajra is sometimes a scepter-like ritual implement, but the term can also take on other esoteric meanings.

Located in 11 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­12
  • 4.­96
  • 6.­9
  • 7.­113
  • 9.­333
  • 9.­341
  • 10.­23
  • 10.­39
  • 10.­43
  • 11.­122
  • 11.­182
g.­396

vice

Wylie:
  • kun nas nyon mongs
Tibetan:
  • ཀུན་ནས་ཉོན་མོངས།
Sanskrit:
  • saṃkleśa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A term meaning defilement, impurity, and pollution, broadly referring to cognitive and emotional factors that disturb and obscure the mind. As the self-perpetuating process of affliction in the minds of beings, it is a synonym for saṃsāra. It is often paired with its opposite, vyavadāna, meaning “purification.”

Located in 70 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­66
  • 1.­83
  • 1.­85
  • 1.­163
  • 1.­166
  • 3.­12
  • 3.­17
  • 3.­19
  • 3.­24
  • 4.­14
  • 4.­41
  • 4.­197
  • 4.­214
  • 4.­224
  • 4.­232
  • 4.­268
  • 4.­288
  • 5.­2
  • 5.­7
  • 5.­12
  • 6.­15-16
  • 7.­219
  • 7.­246
  • 7.­252
  • 7.­322
  • 7.­357
  • 7.­374
  • 8.­53
  • 8.­57-58
  • 9.­43
  • 9.­71
  • 9.­79
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­167
  • 9.­171
  • 9.­173
  • 9.­201
  • 9.­354
  • 10.­5
  • 10.­8
  • 10.­10
  • 10.­16
  • 10.­18
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­22-23
  • 10.­25
  • 10.­27-28
  • 10.­35
  • 10.­40
  • 11.­2
  • 11.­53
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­95
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­124
  • 11.­133
  • 11.­147
  • 11.­178
  • 11.­191-192
  • 11.­195-196
  • 11.­201
  • 11.­203
  • 11.­236
  • 11.­326
g.­397

victorious one

Wylie:
  • rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • jina AS

An epithet of a buddha.

Located in 58 passages in the translation:

  • 1.­4
  • 1.­12
  • 1.­20
  • 1.­89
  • 1.­114
  • 1.­119
  • 2.­53
  • 4.­3
  • 4.­21
  • 4.­23
  • 4.­28
  • 4.­59
  • 4.­61
  • 4.­75
  • 4.­102-103
  • 4.­142
  • 4.­151
  • 4.­158
  • 4.­170
  • 4.­186
  • 4.­249
  • 4.­252
  • 4.­254
  • 4.­260
  • 4.­265
  • 4.­275
  • 4.­277
  • 4.­329
  • 4.­333-335
  • 4.­374
  • 4.­404
  • 4.­419
  • 4.­421
  • 7.­26
  • 7.­94
  • 7.­127
  • 7.­171
  • 7.­187
  • 7.­303-304
  • 7.­308
  • 7.­317
  • 7.­326
  • 7.­330
  • 8.­26
  • 8.­42
  • 9.­68
  • 9.­116
  • 9.­208
  • 9.­258
  • 9.­291
  • 9.­298
  • 10.­37
  • 11.­210-211
g.­400

vigor

Wylie:
  • brtson ’grus
Tibetan:
  • བརྩོན་འགྲུས།
Sanskrit:
  • vīrya AS

One of the six perfections.

Located in 126 passages in the translation:

  • i.­9
  • 1.­87
  • 1.­91
  • 3.­17
  • 4.­1
  • 4.­22
  • 4.­108
  • 4.­112-113
  • 4.­124
  • 4.­129
  • 4.­188-189
  • 4.­191
  • 4.­199
  • 4.­248
  • 4.­311
  • 4.­313
  • 4.­387
  • 4.­393
  • 4.­407
  • 5.­7
  • 5.­20-21
  • 5.­31
  • 6.­1
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­55
  • 7.­59
  • 7.­67
  • 7.­84
  • 7.­116
  • 7.­120
  • 7.­129
  • 7.­136
  • 7.­141
  • 7.­159
  • 7.­168
  • 7.­182
  • 7.­255
  • 7.­260
  • 7.­374
  • 9.­1-5
  • 9.­7-8
  • 9.­10
  • 9.­12-13
  • 9.­15
  • 9.­18-20
  • 9.­31
  • 9.­40
  • 9.­43
  • 9.­65-66
  • 9.­68
  • 9.­165-174
  • 9.­233
  • 9.­268
  • 9.­270
  • 9.­287
  • 9.­295
  • 9.­297-298
  • 9.­301
  • 9.­305-306
  • 9.­333
  • 9.­339
  • 9.­349
  • 9.­352-353
  • 9.­356
  • 9.­358
  • 9.­362
  • 9.­374-376
  • 10.­15-16
  • 10.­20
  • 10.­22
  • 10.­26
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­26
  • 11.­29
  • 11.­32
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­80
  • 11.­83
  • 11.­110
  • 11.­113
  • 11.­119
  • 11.­136
  • 11.­139
  • 11.­165
  • 11.­167
  • 11.­169
  • 11.­175
  • 11.­177
  • 11.­182
  • 11.­189
  • 11.­197
  • 11.­228
  • g.­91
  • g.­94
  • g.­97
  • g.­98
  • g.­104
  • g.­261
  • g.­313
g.­402

Vijitāyus

Wylie:
  • tshe rnam par rgyal ba
Tibetan:
  • ཚེ་རྣམ་པར་རྒྱལ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • vijitāyus AS

A king in the distant past, during the time of the Buddha Mahāskandha.

Located in 3 passages in the translation:

  • 5.­3
  • g.­401
  • g.­404
g.­404

Vīryacarita

Wylie:
  • brtson ’grus spyod pa
Tibetan:
  • བརྩོན་འགྲུས་སྤྱོད་པ།
Sanskrit:
  • vīryacarita AS

The son of King Vijitāyus in the distant past, during the time of the Buddha Mahāskandha.

Located in 6 passages in the translation:

  • i.­6
  • i.­11
  • 5.­3
  • 11.­233-235
g.­405

vision of phenomena

Wylie:
  • chos kyi mig
Tibetan:
  • ཆོས་ཀྱི་མིག
Sanskrit:
  • dharmacakṣus AS

A genuine understanding and realistic view of the state of things.

Located in 1 passage in the translation:

  • 11.­314
g.­406

Vulture’s Peak

Wylie:
  • bya rgod phung po
Tibetan:
  • བྱ་རྒོད་ཕུང་པོ།
Sanskrit:
  • gṛdhrakūṭa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

The Gṛdhra­kūṭa, literally Vulture Peak, was a hill located in the kingdom of Magadha, in the vicinity of the ancient city of Rājagṛha (modern-day Rajgir, in the state of Bihar, India), where the Buddha bestowed many sūtras, especially the Great Vehicle teachings, such as the Prajñāpāramitā sūtras. It continues to be a sacred pilgrimage site for Buddhists to this day.

Located in 9 passages in the translation:

  • i.­2
  • 1.­4-5
  • 2.­45-47
  • 2.­63
  • 2.­78
  • 11.­296
g.­409

wholesome

Wylie:
  • dge ba
Tibetan:
  • དགེ་བ།
Sanskrit:
  • kuśala AS

Proper and conducive to good results.

Located in 64 passages in the translation:

  • 3.­16
  • 3.­33
  • 4.­14
  • 4.­24
  • 4.­135
  • 4.­137
  • 4.­146
  • 4.­161
  • 4.­188
  • 4.­198
  • 4.­252-253
  • 4.­317
  • 4.­325
  • 4.­335-337
  • 4.­354
  • 4.­386
  • 4.­393
  • 4.­406
  • 5.­14
  • 5.­22
  • 5.­27
  • 7.­20
  • 7.­22
  • 7.­101
  • 7.­120
  • 7.­123
  • 7.­125
  • 7.­127
  • 7.­192
  • 7.­203
  • 7.­212
  • 7.­335
  • 7.­374
  • 9.­167
  • 9.­172
  • 9.­174
  • 9.­176
  • 9.­180
  • 9.­194
  • 9.­261
  • 9.­331
  • 10.­12-13
  • 10.­15
  • 10.­28
  • 11.­3
  • 11.­18
  • 11.­55
  • 11.­63
  • 11.­74
  • 11.­103
  • 11.­108
  • 11.­128
  • 11.­162
  • 11.­165-166
  • 11.­177
  • 11.­179
  • 11.­183
  • 11.­195
  • 11.­197
g.­410

yakṣa

Wylie:
  • gnod sbyin
Tibetan:
  • གནོད་སྦྱིན།
Sanskrit:
  • yakṣa AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A class of nonhuman beings who inhabit forests, mountainous areas, and other natural spaces, or serve as guardians of villages and towns, and may be propitiated for health, wealth, protection, and other boons, or controlled through magic. According to tradition, their homeland is in the north, where they live under the rule of the Great King Vaiśravaṇa.

Several members of this class have been deified as gods of wealth (these include the just-mentioned Vaiśravaṇa) or as bodhisattva generals of yakṣa armies, and have entered the Buddhist pantheon in a variety of forms, including, in tantric Buddhism, those of wrathful deities.

Located in 29 passages in the translation:

  • i.­3
  • 1.­2
  • 1.­8
  • 2.­2-3
  • 2.­5-6
  • 2.­14
  • 2.­19
  • 2.­21
  • 2.­45-46
  • 2.­48
  • 2.­59
  • 2.­63
  • 2.­81
  • 7.­206
  • 7.­210-211
  • 7.­213
  • 8.­3
  • 9.­93
  • 9.­113
  • 9.­314
  • 10.­9
  • 10.­12
  • 11.­76
  • g.­173
  • g.­287
g.­415

yojana

Wylie:
  • dpag tshad
Tibetan:
  • དཔག་ཚད།
Sanskrit:
  • yojana AS

Definition from the 84000 Glossary of Terms:

A measure of distance sometimes translated as “league,” but with varying definitions. The Sanskrit term denotes the distance yoked oxen can travel in a day or before needing to be unyoked. From different canonical sources the distance represented varies between four and ten miles.

Located in 15 passages in the translation:

  • 4.­76
  • 4.­115-116
  • 7.­218
  • 7.­335-336
  • 9.­92
  • 9.­164
  • 9.­257
  • 9.­350
  • 10.­20
  • 11.­102
  • 11.­238
  • 11.­305
  • g.­179
0
    You are downloading:

    The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva

    Click here to make a dāna donation

    This is a free publication from 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, a non-profit organization sharing the gift of Buddhist wisdom with the world.

    The cultivation of generosity, or dāna—giving voluntarily with a view that something wholesome will come of it—is considered to be a fundamental Buddhist practice by all schools. The nature and quantity of the gift itself is often considered less important.

    Table of Contents


    Search this text


    Other ways to read

    Download PDF
    Download EPUB
    Open in the 84000 App

    Spotted a mistake?

    Please use the contact form provided to suggest a correction.


    How to cite this text

    The following are examples of how to correctly cite this publication. Links to specific passages can be derived by right-clicking on the milestones markers in the left-hand margin (e.g. s.1). The copied link address can replace the url below.

    • Chicago
    • MLA
    • APA
    84000. The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva (Bodhisatva­piṭaka, byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod, Toh 56). Translated by Norwegian Institute of Palaeography and Historical Philology (PHI). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2024. https://84000.co/translation/toh56/UT22084-040-007-chapter-11.Copy
    84000. The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva (Bodhisatva­piṭaka, byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod, Toh 56). Translated by Norwegian Institute of Palaeography and Historical Philology (PHI), online publication, 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha, 2024, 84000.co/translation/toh56/UT22084-040-007-chapter-11.Copy
    84000. (2024) The Collected Teachings on the Bodhisatva (Bodhisatva­piṭaka, byang chub sems dpa’i sde snod, Toh 56). (Norwegian Institute of Palaeography and Historical Philology (PHI), Trans.). Online publication. 84000: Translating the Words of the Buddha. https://84000.co/translation/toh56/UT22084-040-007-chapter-11.Copy

    Related links

    • Other texts from Heap of Jewels
    • Published Translations
    • Browse the Collection
    • 84000 Homepage
    Sponsor Translation

    Bookmarks

    Copyright © 2011-2024 84000 - All Rights Reserved
    • Website: https://84000.co
    • Contact
    • Privacy Policy